JP2019213912A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing player's motivation to play a game by enhancing a degree of attention to a jackpot game and interest in the jackpot game.SOLUTION: A game machine 10 includes a specific character performance in which a selection character image to a selection character selected from a plurality of characters is displayed on a pattern display part 341 and a visual recognition inhibition performance for inhibiting visual recognition of a performance executed by the pattern display part 341 as performances executed in a jackpot game. In the game machine 10, after an execution round of a visual recognition inhibition performance is determined in an opening/closing execution mode of a jackpot game, an execution round of a specific character performance is determined to be a round differing from the execution round of a visual recognition inhibition performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 61

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine.

  Generally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine, various characters appear on a display such as a liquid crystal display device as an effect for a fluctuating game in a normal gaming state. In addition, as an effect during a jackpot game, there is a type that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in an effect in a variable game (for example, see Patent Document 1). ).

JP-A-2006-47392

  By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to increase the degree of interest in the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game to improve the player's willingness to play.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in a jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game, thereby improving the player's willingness to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention,
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect is a game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as a subject, and the image display. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
When performing the visual impairment effect in the special game, the effect executing means (51) sets the timing for executing the visual impairment effect, and then sets the timing at a timing different from the timing for executing the visual impairment effect. There is provided a means for setting so that the selection subject image effect is executed.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can increase the degree of interest in the jackpot game and the interest in the jackpot game, thereby improving the player's willingness to win the jackpot game.

FIG. 1 is an exemplary perspective view showing an example of the configuration of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of a configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is an exemplary development view illustrating an example of a configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board when the movable accessory member of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1 is at a standby position. The front view which shows an example of the game board when a movable role member is in an operation position. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine illustrated in FIG. 1. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a storage area of a main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 1. The figure which shows an example of the table used by the main control device. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the main control device. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a start winning process executed in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 9. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main process executed by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a data setting process executed in the variable game control process of FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a change start process executed in the change game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the big hit game control process performed in the main process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the time chart of the big hit game performed in the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of an open / close execution mode control process executed in the big hit game control process of FIG. 16. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub timer interrupt process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation button operation detection process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19; 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an operation detection pattern determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19; The figure which shows an example of the operation data table which shows the relationship between a detection pattern and operation status. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game setting process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 24 is a view showing a transition example of a display screen on the symbol display unit in the game setting process of FIG. 23. FIG. 24 is a view illustrating an example of a display screen on a symbol display unit in the game setting process of FIG. 23. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game start standby process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a top menu screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a game setting screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of a character selection screen process executed in the game setting process of FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a command determination process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to when a variable command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 30. FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to when a variable command is received in the command determination processing of FIG. 30. FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 30. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred to in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred to in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of a visual impediment effect determination process performed in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33. (A) is a diagram illustrating an example of the opening and closing execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33, and an example of a round game in which a visual impairment effect is executed, and (B) illustrates an example of a round game effect screen. FIG. The figure which shows an example of the promotion effect performed as a visual recognition inhibition effect in a big hit game effect. The figure which shows an example of the held extended-village fixed effect performed as a visual recognition inhibition effect in a big hit game effect. The figure which shows an example of the specific number payout display effect performed as a visual obstruction effect in the big hit game effect. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an error process performed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19; 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an error process performed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19; The figure which shows an example of an error display performed as a visual recognition inhibition effect in a big hit game effect. 20 is a flowchart showing an example of a jackpot game effect process executed in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of a payout display effect process executed in the big hit game process of FIG. A flowchart showing an example of a round game effect process executed in the big hit game process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred to by the big hit game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred by the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a visual impairment effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an error process executed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of an error display on the symbol display unit in the error processing of FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a view showing another example of the error display on the symbol display unit in the error processing of FIG. 50. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an error process executed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the big hit game character effect data table referred by the big hit game effect determination processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred by the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the big hit game character effect data table referred by the big hit game effect determination processing performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the big hit game character effect data table referred by the big hit game effect determination processing performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention. 18 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a payout display effect process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process performed by the audio ramp control device of the gaming machine according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R referred to in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R referred to in the big hit game effect determination process of FIG.

  Hereinafter, a first embodiment to a sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings to provide an understanding of the present invention. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, a gaming machine 10 according to a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Schematic configuration of gaming machine 10]
1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIGS. 4 and 5 are front views of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the expressions of front, rear, left and right and up and down used in the present embodiment are defined by the front and rear direction D1, the vertical direction D2, and the left and right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine having a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. The outer frame 14 is fixed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a spinning-type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrangement ball gaming machine, and a jing ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention is applicable to a gaming machine.

[Configuration of Front Frame 11]
The front frame 11 is openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 14 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the outer frame 14. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by a rotatably supported left end portion of the inner frame 12.

  The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a selection determining unit 21, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 6) for switching an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5, which will be described later, depending on whether or not a pressing operation is performed. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is, for example, a promotion effect as a visual impediment effect to be described later, such as an operation button effect that is executed when the player operates the operation button 20 in a predetermined specific period in the variable game effect (FIG. 38). Operation). The operation button 20 is operated to shift the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 described later from the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). You.

  The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the position in front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position on the front frame 11 as long as the position can be operated by the player. The number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more. Furthermore, the operation switch 20a is not limited to a contact switch, and may be, for example, a piezoelectric element as long as it can be used to detect the presence or absence of an operation by a player.

  It is also conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation of the touch key by a player is provided instead of the operation button 20. Further, instead of the operation buttons 20, a panel 25 and a touch sensor for detecting a touch operation of the player on the panel 25 may be provided. The operation button 20 may include a jog dial. In these cases, the operation of the player on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected on the operation button effect and the like.

  The selection determining unit 21 is operated by a player, and is a push button that receives a pressing operation of the player in a game setting process (see FIG. 23) described later. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

  The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player to temporarily select desired items from options (items) such as the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) in the game setting process. An upper selection button 211, a lower selection button 212, a left selection button 213, and a right selection button 214 are included. Each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 is used to switch an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch 211d (FIG. 6). Reference). Accordingly, the audio lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of each of the selection buttons 211 to 214.

  On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to decide the provisionally selected item. The determination button 21B includes a determination operation switch 21Ba that switches an input signal to the audio lamp control device 5 described later. Thus, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the determination button 21B.

  Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a touch panel that displays a touch key and receives an operation by the player of the touch key may be provided as an operation unit. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B, a panel 25 and a touch sensor that detects a player's touch operation on the panel 25 may be provided as operation means. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial in place of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214).

  The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by a player to fire a game ball. In the gaming machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from a game ball firing mechanism 32 described later with an intensity corresponding to the amount of rotation of the firing handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the driving of the game ball firing mechanism 32 is controlled so that one game ball is fired toward the game area in 0.6 seconds.

  The upper plate 23 is disposed below the panel 25, stores game balls paid out from a payout device 132 of a payout mechanism 130 described below, and arranges the stored game balls in a line. It is used to guide the game ball launching mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23 and is used for storing surplus game balls in the upper plate 23.

  The panel 25 is a colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows a player to visually recognize the gaming board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the gaming machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right of the upper end of the front frame 11, and include a variable game effect process (step S1911 in FIG. 19), a jackpot game effect process (see step S1912 in FIG. 19, and FIG. 44). In addition to executing a sound effect of outputting a sound at the time, an audio output for notifying that an error has occurred when an error occurs. Note that the installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. The illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as a display lamp and an LED, and performs a lamp effect in a lighting mode such as lighting or blinking.

[Configuration of Inner Frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball firing mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. In FIG. 2, the illustration on the game board 31 is omitted for simplicity of illustration.

  The control unit 33 has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 in one direction. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described later.

  As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first operating opening 314, a second operating opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, An out port 318, a variable display unit 34, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and a movable accessory member 39 are provided.

  The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending out the game balls fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward a game area on the board of the game board 31. Then, after being fired from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, game balls that have not entered the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Is done.

  Here, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeder 322, and a solenoid 323, as shown in FIG. 2. The shooting rail 321 is formed from the game ball firing mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 is sent to the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. To guide. The ball feeder 322 has driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to the launch rail 321 one by one. The solenoid 323 is a driving unit that fires the game balls supplied on the firing rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. In the gaming machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in accordance with the operation of the shooting handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism 32 to the game board 31. Note that the game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism that launches game balls using other driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

  Returning to the description of FIGS. 4 and 5, the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening 318 have openings through the game board 31 in the front-rear direction. Is formed. And, on the back side of the game board 31, it is possible to individually detect the entrance of a game ball corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 6) are provided. The through gate 317 is a gate through which a game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 6) that can individually detect a game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball passed through the through gate 317 when the game ball sent out to the game board 31 passes on the right side of the game board 31, that is, when hitting right.

  The incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a (see FIG. 6) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection results of the incoming ball sensors 313a to 317a are input to the main control unit 331. Hereinafter, detection of the entry of game balls by the entry sensors 313a to 317a may be referred to as winning. Note that the ball sensors 313a to 317a are, for example, proximity sensors of the electromagnetic induction type, but may be any sensors capable of individually detecting the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method.

  Further, the second operating port 315 is provided with an electric accessory 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on a game ball entering the second operating port 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening of the electric accessory 315b allows the game ball to enter the second operating port 315, and the closing of the electric accessory 315b allows the entering of the game ball to the second operating port 315. The sphere is restricted.

  Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 316b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on entering a game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The door 316b is opened and closed by driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. In the gaming board 31, the opening of the opening / closing door 316b enables the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316, and the closing of the opening / closing door 316b restricts the entry of gaming balls into the variable winning opening 316. You.

  In the gaming machine 10, when the entering ball of the game ball into the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is detected by the incoming ball sensor 314a or the incoming ball sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a jackpot lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 37 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. The result of the lottery by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 according to the result of the lottery.

  Also, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of game balls into the general winning opening 313, the first operating opening 314, the second operating opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entrance sensors 313a to 316a, A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of prize balls entering the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 is 3, and the variable winning opening 316 is entered. In this case, the number of prize balls is thirteen. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the result of the lottery performed in the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the game machine shifts to a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and a round gaming (unit game) described later in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times, 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be paid out.

  When a game ball wins in the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315, a jackpot lottery is executed. If the lottery result is a winning, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R regular jackpot gaming state and 5R certain-variable jackpot gaming state) and a 16R certain-variable jackpot gaming state. The 5R jackpot game state is an open / close execution in which a round game (unit game) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or a predetermined number of game balls or more enter the variable winning opening 316 is performed five times. It is a game state including a mode. The 16R probability change jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which round games (unit games) are performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be paid out than the 5R jackpot game state, and the 5R jackpot game state can be expected. This is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

  The variable display unit 34 has a symbol display section 341 such as a liquid crystal display which is arranged so as to be visible through an opening 31A formed substantially in the center of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, a symbol variation display and a variation game corresponding to a lottery result in a jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 in response to a ball entering the first operation port 314 or the second operation port 315. Various displays such as effect display are performed. The symbol display unit 341 is an example of the image display unit of the present invention, and constitutes the rendering unit of the present invention. The symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display. Further, one or a plurality of sub-display units may be provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. The sub display unit is arranged, for example, at the upper or lower part of the symbol display unit 341 or at the left or right part. The sub display unit may be movable between a position where the symbol display unit 341 is covered and a position where the symbol display unit 341 is not covered. Further, the sub display unit may be arranged on the upper plate 23. The sub display unit may constitute the image display unit of the present invention alone or together with the symbol display unit 341.

  For example, the symbol variation display on the symbol display section 341 is performed by sequentially scrolling a plurality of types of main symbols numbered “1” to “9” in a vertical direction, a horizontal direction, an oblique direction, or the like. In addition, a sub-design such as another character or a design may be displayed between the main designs. Further, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that there are no sub-designs, and the main design types are "1" to "9".

  In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the main symbols is stopped after a preset variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. . More specifically, in the symbol variation display, first, all main symbols fluctuate along a preset variation direction (for example, a horizontal direction, a vertical direction, or the like), and the variation of a plurality of main symbols stops in order. Then, when the variation of the main symbols in all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time has elapsed, the symbol variation display ends.

  When the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 ends, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state where the main symbols are arranged on one or more effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the main symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is “5R probability variable jackpot”, “16R probability variable jackpot” or “5R normal jackpot”, a state in which main symbols of the same symbol are arranged in an activated line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the symbol is a jackpot. Is done. In addition, the jackpot type is sometimes specified by a combination of main symbols in the activated line, but is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, a state in which the symbol combination of, for example, “777” set as the symbol combination indicating the 16R probability change jackpot among the main symbols is arranged in an active line Is displayed, or a state in which the same symbol combinations other than “777” are arranged in an effective line is displayed. When the lottery result is "5R probability change jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333" set in advance as the symbol combination indicating the 5R probability change jackpot in the main symbol are arranged in an effective line is displayed. Alternatively, a state is displayed in which the same symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations indicating the 16R probability change jackpot or the 5R probability change jackpot such as “777” or “333” are arranged in the active line. When the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, a combination other than the combination of the symbols indicating the probable big hit such as “222” or “444” set in advance as the symbol combination indicating the normal jackpot among the main symbols is used. A state is displayed in which combinations of the same symbols are arranged in an activated line. When the lottery result is “missing”, a state in which combinations of different main symbols are arranged in an effective line (for example, “323” or “723”) is displayed.

  In addition, the symbol display section 341 displays a symbol game variation display in the variable game and a variable game effect indicating the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit. When the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, when a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of the main symbol indicating the 16R probability change jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, as the variable game effect, the 5R probability change jackpot is displayed. Or, a suggestion effect indicating that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the big hit game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R certain variable big hit is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and a state in which the jackpot symbol combinations other than the main symbol combination indicating the probable jackpot are arranged on the activated line is displayed, the variable game effect is a 5R regular jackpot. Is performed. In this case, in the variable game effect or the big hit game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R certain variable big hit is executed.

  Furthermore, when the gaming state shifts to the jackpot gaming state, the symbol display section 341 displays a jackpot gaming effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect. On the other hand, when the variable game effect or the jackpot game effect is not displayed (in the non-game state), the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 is changed to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25B ))). By operating the selection deciding section 21 (a plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the decision button 21B), the display screen on the symbol display section 341 is changed from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) to a character. It is possible to shift to another display screen on which game settings can be made, such as the selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25D). In the present embodiment, by operating the selection deciding unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the deciding button 21B), a plurality of characters (specific selection subjects) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the variable game effect are displayed. It is possible to set a character to be selected from characters (selection). The details of the character setting will be described later with reference to FIG. 29 and the like.

  The magnet sensor 35 is provided around the first operation port 314 and on the back side of the game board 31. The magnet sensor 35 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the magnet sensor 35 is input to the main control unit 331. Thereby, when an act of trying to guide a game ball to the first operation port 314 using a magnet is performed illegally, the illegal operation can be detected. The magnet sensor 35 may be provided around the variable winning opening 316. Accordingly, in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game, when an act of winning a game ball that greatly exceeds the upper limit number in the variable winning opening 316 is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act.

  The radio wave sensor 36 is provided around the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 and on the back side of the game board 31. The radio wave sensor 36 is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor 36 is input to the main control unit 331. Accordingly, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave to the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, it is possible to detect the illegal act. The radio wave sensor 36 can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz. In addition, a radio wave sensor 36 may be similarly provided around the special winning opening 319b.

  The main display unit 37 includes an LED pair 371, two 7-segment displays 372 and 373, and an LED group 374 arranged at the upper right part of the game board 31. In the LED pair 371, the winning result of the through gate 317 is used as a trigger, and the result of the lottery in the main control unit 331 as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b is displayed by a combination of lighting and extinguishing (lighting pattern). On the 7-segment display 372, the symbol change display is performed with the winning of the first operating port 314 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. On the seven-segment display 373, the symbol change display is performed with the winning of the second operating port 315 as a trigger, and the symbol according to the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the main control unit 331 is stopped and displayed. In the LED group 374, the number of holdings N and the number of holdings M of the variable display generated by winning the first operation port 314 and the second operation port 315 are displayed by a plurality of LED lighting patterns.

  The movable accessory member 39 is a decorative member that is operable in the gaming machine 10 in a predetermined manner and is also generally referred to as an “accessory”. In the present embodiment, the movable accessory member 39 includes a predetermined standby position (see FIG. 4) located above the symbol display portion 341 and an operating position (see FIG. 5) set below the standby position. Is movable along the surface of the symbol display section 341. In the standby position shown in FIG. 4, the movable accessory member 39 is partially exposed from the opening 31A, and is mostly hidden around the opening 31A. Therefore, at the standby position, the visual recognition of the image effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 by the movable accessory member 39 is hardly hindered. On the other hand, in the operating position shown in FIG. 5, the movable accessory member 39 covers the central portion of the symbol display section 341, and the visual effect of the image effect executed on the symbol display section 341 is impaired. That is, the movable auditors' operation effect of moving the movable auditors member 39 from the standby position to the operating position is an example of the visual obstruction effect of the present invention. In addition, the movable accessory member 39 is an example of the movable member of the present invention, and constitutes the production means of the present invention.

  In addition, the movable accessory member 39 may be entirely hidden without being exposed from the opening 31A at the standby position. The gaming machine 10 may include a plurality of movable accessory members 39. Further, the movable accessory member 39 may be a combination of a plurality of separated movable members, a member capable of being deformed into two or more forms, or a member having a display such as a liquid crystal display device. Needless to say, the movable accessory member 39 is not limited to the one that covers a part of the display screen of the symbol display unit 341, but may be one that covers the entire display screen.

  Such a movable auditors member 39 is controlled to operate in an effect or the like for indicating a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in a variable game. In particular, the movable role member 39 is operated as a definite effect indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a win, and is also operated as a chance-up effect when the probability that the lottery is a big hit is high. Often. In the present embodiment, the movable auditors member 39 is operated in a jackpot game, in a promotion effect described later, and in a reservation extended residence confirmation effect.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming machine 10 includes a motor 39a for supplying a driving force to the movable auditors member 39, and a return detector 39b for detecting that the movable auditors member 39 has returned to the standby position. Having. The motor 39a is a stepping motor, a DC motor, or the like, and the return detection unit 39b is an optical sensor, a contact sensor, or the like. The movable accessory member 39 and the motor 39a are connected via a drive transmission mechanism such as a drive gear (not shown), and directs the movable accessory member 39 from the standby position to the operating position according to the rotation direction of the motor 39a. Move from the operating position to the standby position.

  The gaming machine 10 also includes a motor driver 39c to which the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b are connected. The motor driver 39c is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the audio lamp control device 5. Then, the motor driver 39c controls the motor 39a according to a control instruction from the audio lamp control device 5. In addition, the motor driver 39c can acquire the detection result by the return detection unit 39b and transmit the result to the audio lamp control device 5. Note that the motor 39a and the return detection unit 39b may be directly connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the sound lamp control device 5 and controlled by the sound lamp control device 5.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

  The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 that stores ball balls supplied from island facilities (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 that pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of game balls paid out by the payout device 132 and the like. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts power supplied from an island facility (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected to a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the voltage to a control device and a driving unit provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, a system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.

[Main control unit 331]
The main control unit 331 includes the main control device 4 that executes main control of a game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for shifting to a predetermined jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and the like. The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and is an example of a main control unit of the present invention. The MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by main controller 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs signals to the main control device 4 and outputs control signals from the main control device 4. In addition, the input / output I / F 42 is connected with ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, a magnet sensor 35, a radio wave sensor 36, a main display unit 37, and the like. The MPU 41 determines whether or not a general winning port 313, a first operating port 314, a second operating port 315, a variable winning port 316, and a through gate 317 have entered the ball based on the detection signals from the ball sensors 313a to 317a. Judge. Further, the MPU 41 determines whether there is any fraudulent activity using magnets or radio waves based on detection signals from the magnet sensor 35 and the radio wave sensor 36. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to a sound lamp control device 5, a payout control device 7, a firing control device 8, a power control device 9, and the like.

  Then, the MPU 41 instructs the sound ramp control device 5 to change the variation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, the shift command, the big hit game start command, the big hit game end command, the round game start command, the ending start command, and the variable winning. It outputs commands such as a prize winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error elimination command.

  The fluctuation pattern command is a command for notifying the fluctuation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery to the audio lamp control device 5, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit. When starting the symbol variation display by the symbol display unit 341 and the main display unit 37, the variation pattern command is based on information stored in a later-described holding storage area 412b, and is used in step S1612 in the variation start process in FIG. Is set. The variation pattern command may be a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 of only the variation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of the lottery result and the type of the big hit in the big hit lottery is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

  When the number of holds N or the number of holds M stored in the later-described hold storage area 412b increases, the first hold command and the second hold command include a lottery result, a fluctuation pattern, and a jackpot lottery for the increased hold. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on information stored in a later-described hold storage area 412b when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (the first hold command in FIG. 11). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the hold command setting process.

  The shift command indicates a lottery result in a jackpot lottery in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 or the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 when the holding number N or the holding number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the success / failure information has shifted. The shift command is set in step S1512 in the data setting process of FIG.

  The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. It is set in step S1702 in the game control process. In addition, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the audio ramp control device 5 that the jackpot game is started, the audio ramp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the start of the opening can be grasped. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command, and the voice lamp control device 5 may recognize that the opening is started by the opening command.

  The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, that is, the game state shifts from the jackpot game state to another game state, and in the jackpot game control process of FIG. Is set in step S1723.

  The round game start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 of starting round games and round information indicating the number of the round in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, This is set in step S1813 in the opening / closing execution mode control process of FIG. In addition, in the sound ramp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended by the round game start command and the opening and closing execution mode is started, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command, Alternatively, an opening / closing execution mode start command may be set when the opening / closing execution mode starts. In addition to the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5.

  The ending start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the ending is started, that is, the end of the opening / closing execution mode. When the ending is started, the step S1718 in the big hit game control process of FIG. Is set.

  The variable winning opening winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a gaming ball has won the variable winning opening 316. When a gaming ball wins the variable winning opening 316, a prize ball command setting process ( This is set in step S1303) of FIG.

  The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred. When an error occurs, the error determination command in FIG. 9 is used as an error occurrence command corresponding to the type of error (step S1007). ).

  The error elimination command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the error has been eliminated. When the error is eliminated, the error determination command shown in FIG. 9 is used as an error elimination command corresponding to the type of error (step S1007). ).

  Note that commands other than the above-described commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the audio lamp control device 5, but the description thereof will be omitted.

  The main control device 4 also includes an oscillation circuit and a frequency dividing circuit as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillation circuit outputs a clock signal of a predetermined frequency, and the frequency divider changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillation circuit and inputs the clock signal to the MPU 41. Specifically, an execution cycle of a main timer interrupt process described below executed by the MPU 41 is determined by a clock signal output from the frequency divider.

  In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency dividing circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 generates a main timer signal every time a rising (or falling) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the loading process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as necessary, and supply an operation clock mainly controlled by the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

  The ROM 411 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command transmitted to the audio lamp control device 5 or the like. Note that the RAM 412 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  Here, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a jackpot lottery or the like will be described with reference to FIG. Specifically, the MPU 41 uses the lottery counter 412a, the holding storage area 412b, and the counter information stored in the power saving area 412c of the RAM 412 to execute a jackpot lottery and set a variable display time.

  The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for a jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining a missed type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting an initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and a fluctuation type counter CS1 for determining a fluctuation display time in the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341. It is. Further, in the lottery counter 412a, an ordinary random number counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is in the electric open state and an initial value setting of the ordinary random number counter C4 are set. , And a normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used. Hereinafter, when the plurality of types of counters are collectively described, they are simply referred to as counters.

  The counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which the MPU 41 adds 1 to the previous value at short time intervals and returns to 0 after reaching a preset maximum value. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 at the time of jackpot lottery and setting of the variable display time.

  The suspension storage area 412b includes a first suspension storage area REA, a second suspension storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first reserved storage area REA includes a first reserved area REA1, a second reserved area REA2, a third reserved area REA3, a fourth reserved area REA4, and a reserved number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first hold storage area REA, and the type of the variable game that the 7-segment display 372 displays and stops is referred to as a first special symbol game. is there. The second reserved storage area REB includes a first reserved area REB1, a second reserved area REB2, a third reserved area REB3, a fourth reserved area REB4, and a reserved number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, a jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second hold storage area REB, and the type of the variable game that the 7-segment display 373 displays and stops is referred to as a second special symbol game. is there.

  When a game ball enters the first operating port 314, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is used as a jackpot. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second operating port 315, information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a big hit. The information is acquired as the success / failure information used in the lottery, and is stored in any one of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB. The acquisition process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 functioning as the determination unit of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. In addition, the lottery counter 412a (the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, etc.) is individually corresponding to each of the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. May be provided.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the change type counter CS1 includes the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA of the first holding storage area REA. It is stored in any one of the first to fourth holding areas REB4 of the REA4 and the second holding storage area REB.

  Therefore, the jackpot lottery for the variable game executed based on the success / failure information stored in the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the second holding storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result, it is possible to determine in advance the variation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first operating port 314, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. Is stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAA, the number of pieces of rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REA1 to REA4 is stored as the number of reservations N.

  Also, when a game ball enters the second operating port 315, the hit / fail information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the number-of-reservations storage area NAB, the number of the rejection information stored in the first to fourth reservation areas REB1 to REB4 is stored as the number of reservations M.

  That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first operating port 314 is provided by the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the eight holding areas corresponding to the maximum holding number of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. In addition, it is possible to suspend up to four pieces of winning / losing information as a winning history of a game ball to the second operating port 315, respectively.

  It is also conceivable as another embodiment that the first working port 314 and the second working port 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum holding number of 8 in common, and even in this case, up to a maximum of 8 areas in total. It is possible to suspend the winning / failing information as a winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing a process according to the control program.

  When the symbol change display on the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341 is started, the execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. Is a storage area used to move the pass / fail information stored in the storage area. Specifically, the hit / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and no hit / fail information exists in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the number-of-reserves storage area NAB is 0, the success / failure information of the first reservation area REA1 of the first reservation storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

  Note that the difference between the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the number N of holds in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is also conceivable as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Another embodiment is also considered in which the success / failure information of the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA and the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area RB are alternately moved to the execution area AE.

  Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a jackpot lottery or the like based on numerical information stored in the execution area AE as win / fail information. At this time, when the first holding area REA1 of the first holding storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the hit / fail information stored in the second holding area REA2 is shifted to the first holding area REA1, and the third holding area REA1 is shifted to the third holding area REA1. The rejection information stored in the reservation area REA3 is shifted to the second reservation area REA2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REA4 is shifted to the third reservation area REA3.

  Similarly, when the first holding area REB1 of the second holding storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the success / failure information stored in the second holding area REB2 is shifted to the first holding area REB1, and the third holding area REB1 is shifted to the third holding area REB1. The rejection information stored in the area REB3 is shifted to the second reservation area REB2, and the rejection information stored in the fourth reservation area REB4 is shifted to the third reservation area REB3.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 738, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is determined by a winning / rejecting table stored in a winning / rejecting table storage area of the ROM 411, based on the low probability mode (first notification gaming state) which is a normal gaming state and the high probability mode (second notification mode) which is a positive-change gaming state. Two types are set corresponding to the notification game state). Here, FIG. 8A is a view showing an example of a low probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the low probability mode, and FIG. 8B is a view showing an example of a high probability mode success / failure table corresponding to the high probability mode. In the example shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the low probability mode is a big hit is two (373, 727), and the big hit in the high probability mode. The number of random numbers at which the lottery result in the lottery is a big hit is thirteen (59, 109, 163, 211, 263, 317, 373, 421, 479, 523, 631, 683, 727). Here, in the low probability mode success / failure table and the high probability mode success / failure table, two random numbers (373, 727) for which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit are common, but they may not be common. Further, the random number to be a big hit may not be a discrete value, but may be a continuous value partially or entirely. If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than these random numbers for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be out of order.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probability jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the assignment table stored in the assignment table storage area of the ROM 411. Here, FIG. 8C is a diagram illustrating an example of the distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (C), when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game, the number of random numbers with a 5R probability of change is 0 to 10 and the number of random numbers with a 16R probability of change is Are 5 to 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers which are usually 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game, the number of random numbers having a 5R probability variable jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the number of random numbers having a 16R variable jackpot is 10 from 5 to 14. The number of random numbers that usually have 5R jackpots is 5 to 15 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probability changing machine in which the probability of the probability change jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of the 16R probability change jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probable change time saving game state, the expected value of the game ball acquisition when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is set higher than in the normal game state such as the normal time saving game state or the normal non-time saving game state. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a first operating port 314 that triggers execution of a first special symbol game by winning a game ball, and a second operating port that triggers execution of a second special symbol game by winning of a game ball An individual distribution table is set for each 315, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on whether the game ball has won the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315, but the first special symbol It is conceivable that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same between the game and the second special symbol game. In addition, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to a loop-type change machine, and may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a one-type / two-type mixer, or the like.

  Then, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probable jackpot”, “16R probable jackpot”, “5R normal It is determined which of “big hit” and “missing”.

  Here, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot, an open / close execution mode in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times is executed. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability changing big hit, an open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times is executed.

  In the case of the 5R probability change jackpot or the 16R probability change jackpot, the probability change is a high probability mode (second notification game state) in which a jackpot winning probability is high after the jackpot game ends and a high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Shift to time saving mode. The probability variation time saving mode is continued until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R probability variation jackpot”, “16R probability variation jackpot”, or “5R normal jackpot”.

  On the other hand, in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal time-saving mode in which the winning probability of the jackpot is low after the jackpot game is completed (the first notification game state) and the high-frequency support mode in which the probability of opening the electric accessory 315b is high. Executed in The high frequency support mode in the normal time saving mode is continued until a predetermined number of times, for example, 50 times or 100 times of jackpot lottery ends.

  By the way, when the gaming machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of the loop probability changing machine, a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of the big hit lottery after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability changing big hit. Is executed in the probabilistic time saving mode (high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode), and thereafter, the mode shifts to the low-probability mode, and the high-frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable as another embodiment to perform a drop lottery from the probable time saving mode to the normal time saving mode or the low probability mode. In addition, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the game is not shifted to the jackpot gaming state and the high frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, a case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpot types, that is, a 5R probability variable jackpot, a 16R probability variable jackpot, and a 5R regular jackpot, will be described as an example. It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round normal jackpot, 16R normal jackpot.

  The reach random number counter C3 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 238, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is updated periodically, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

  In the gaming machine 10, the type of the stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is selected by the reach random number counter C3 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, according to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, after the reach occurs, the last stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol and stops before and after the reach, which also causes the reach. After that, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is set for each of the three types of reach, that is, reach other than before and after the stop where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol, and complete miss where no reach occurs. Here, FIG. 8D is a diagram illustrating an example of the departure type table. In the example shown in FIG. 8 (D), the random number value for reach out of order is 0 to 8, the random number value for reach other than out of order is 9 to 38, and the random number value for complete out of reach is 39. 238. Note that the MPU 41 determines that a reach has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game that wins the 5R certain jackpot, the 16R variable jackpot, or the 5R regular jackpot, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

  Here, “reach” indicates a state in which a symbol combination of a main symbol indicating that a big hit has been won is displayed between the time when the symbol change display is started on the symbol display unit 341 and the time when the symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the activated line in the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one of the stop positions fluctuates. In addition, during the reach change state in the symbol display unit 341, a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest a degree of expectation, and a game in which the operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect. A user participation type operation effect process is executed. During the execution of the effect processing, it is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 is hidden, or displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner.

  For example, the electric accessory opening counter C4 is incremented by one in the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is updated periodically, and is stored in the electric utility holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed based on the value of the electric auditors product opening counter C4 stored in the electric auditors holding area 412c to determine whether or not the electric auditors product 315b is to be opened for a predetermined time. For example, it is conceivable that the winning is performed when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and that when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250, it is out of order.

  The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by one, for example, in the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation type, such as a so-called normal reach, a super reach, and a special reach, as a variation game effect. The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process described later is executed once by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315.

  Then, the MPU 41 determines a variation pattern indicating the variation display time based on the variation type counter CS1 and a preset variation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of the variation pattern while referring to the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, or the deviation variation table stored in advance in the variation table storage area of the ROM 411. Note that these change tables may be provided separately for each of the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  Here, FIGS. 8 (E), 8 (F), and 8 (G) are diagrams showing examples of the normal jackpot variation table, the probability variation jackpot variation table, and the deviation variation table. As shown in FIG. 8 (E), FIG. 8 (F) and FIG. 8 (G), in the normal jackpot variation table, the probable variation jackpot variation table and the outlier variation table, the variation pattern is previously determined according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Corresponding. If the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is “5R ordinary jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines whether the lottery result is “5R regular jackpot”, or if the lottery result is “5R certain jackpot” or “16R certain jackpot”, the variable jackpot variation table. If the result is "out", the type of the fluctuation pattern is specified with reference to the out-of-range fluctuation tables.

  More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 (E) and 8 (F), in the normal jackpot variation table and the probability variation jackpot variation table, the variation patterns “01” to “03” according to the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected. Here, when the variation pattern “01” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the variation display in the normal reach mode in which the variation display time is 30 s. When the variation pattern “02” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the variation display in the super reach mode in which the variation display time is 60 s. Further, when the fluctuation pattern “03” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the fluctuation display in the special reach mode in which the fluctuation display time is the longest 90 s. The types of the fluctuation patterns are not limited to these. In addition, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided separately for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the normal reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", a plurality of types of normal reach with different characters, stories, and the like are prepared, and one of the normal reach selected from them is executed.

  Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, as the super reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", a plurality of types of super reach having different characters, stories, and the like are prepared, and any one of the selected super reach is executed. You. Super Reach is a reach that has longer fluctuation time than Normal Reach and shorter fluctuation time than Special Reach. The probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach, and the big hit is won than the special reach This is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expected degree) of playing is low.

  Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the special reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach with different characters and stories are prepared, and any one of the special reach selected from the special reach is executed. You. The special reach is a reach that has a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach and the super reach, and is, for example, a reach that includes an effect that evolves from the normal reach or the super reach.

  The reach corresponding to the fluctuation pattern includes a single operation effect in which a single operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, a continuous operation operation in which a continuous hit operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, and a game. A player participation type operation effect such as a long press operation effect in which a long press operation of the operation button 20 by a player is reflected in the effect may be included.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8 (G), in the departure variation table, each departure stop type (reach in front and rear, reach other than front and rear departure, complete departure) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3, The correspondence between the counter CS1 and the variation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of departure is the out-of-front-reach reach or the reach other than the out-of-front-reach, any of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. . On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of departure is completely departure, either the fluctuation pattern “04” or “05” is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern “04” is selected, the fluctuation display time is 7 s and the fluctuation display without the reach is executed on the symbol display unit 341. When the fluctuation pattern “05” is selected, the symbol display unit 341 performs the fluctuation display without the reach with the fluctuation display time of 10 s.

  For example, in the gaming machine 10, as a variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display is released without a notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, and the like, and the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at a symbol. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display is released with a notice effect in which a character, a message, or the like is displayed, and the variation display of the deviation pattern in which the pattern is stopped at the symbol. Be executed. In addition, in the case of the variation display at the time of the off corresponding to the variation pattern “05”, a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

  When the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the seven-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 and the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 41 changes the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern command indicating the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Input to the audio lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is “5R normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines that the fluctuation pattern command “A” indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03”. A01 ”to“ A03 ”are output. In addition, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 determines that the variation pattern command “B01” has “B” indicating that it is a 5R probability change hit before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. To “B03”. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 sets the variation pattern command “C01” with “C” indicating the 16R probability change hit before the variation patterns “01” to “03”. To “C03”. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 sets the fluctuation pattern commands “D01” to “D05” with “D” indicating that the lottery is out before the fluctuation patterns “01” to “05”. Is output. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result, the symbol display unit 341. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed by are determined. Then, the sound lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the sound from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and turns on and blinks the illumination unit 27. , Turn off the light.

  Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 executes a simple process of determining a fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will be. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is configured by an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the sound lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute various variation modes as the variation mode.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control unit 332 includes an audio lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331, a symbol change display and a symbol change display on the symbol display unit 341. Execute the effect display.

[Sound lamp control device 5]
The sound lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

  The ROM 511 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in variable game effects and jackpot game effects, lamp blink patterns, and the like. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 51. Note that the RAM 512 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The sound lamp control device 5 executes a process in accordance with the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51, and sends a command to the display control device 6 based on a command (control signal) input from the main control device 4. (Control signal), and controls the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 controls the reproduction audio output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when performing a variable game effect and a jackpot game effect described later.

  The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface for inputting a signal to the audio ramp control device 5 and outputting a control signal from the audio ramp control device 5. Specifically, the main controller 4 and the display controller 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, the main controller 4 sends the voice lamp controller 5 a change pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a jackpot game start command, and a jackpot game end. Commands such as a command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a variable winning opening winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error elimination command are input. Further, the audio lamp control device 5 outputs a display variation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. A configuration in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the audio lamp control device 5 is also conceivable as another embodiment. A configuration in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both functions of the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6 is also considered as another embodiment.

  The input / output I / F 52 is connected to the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the motor driver 39c. In the sound lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 can control the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like based on the command input from the main control device 4. Further, the MPU 51 can control the motor 39a via the motor driver 39c to operate the movable accessory member 39 (see FIGS. 4 and 5), and obtains the detection result by the return detection unit 39b. It is possible to determine whether or not the movable accessory member 39 has returned to the standby state. Further, the input / output I / F 52 is connected to an operation switch 20a, an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, a right selection operation switch 211d, and a decision operation switch 21Ba. Accordingly, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20, the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214), and the determination button 21B have been operated, and executes the operation on the symbol display unit 341 based on the detection result. It is also possible to control the game effect performed, the sound output from the speaker 26, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

  The MPU 51 controls the fluctuation pattern command, the first hold command, the second hold command, the shift command, the jackpot game start command, the jackpot game end command, the open / close actual mode start command, and the open / close actual mode end command input from the main controller 4. A predetermined calculation process is executed based on commands such as a round game start command, a round game end command, and a variable winning opening winning command.

  Specifically, when a fluctuation pattern command is input, the MPU 51, based on the fluctuation pattern command, changes the fluctuation pattern (stop symbol combination of main symbol, fluctuation display time, fluctuation type (see FIG. 31B)), and The effect type (see FIGS. 32A to 32C) is determined, and a display change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (steps S2703 to S2703 in the command determination process in FIG. 30). S2705), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of main symbols corresponding to the deviation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R normal jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot is displayed, and when the fluctuation pattern command indicates the 5R certain variable jackpot, the combination of the main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R variable jackpot. Is displayed, and in the case of indicating the 16R probability change jackpot, a combination of main symbols corresponding to the 5R normal hit, 5R probability change hit or 16R probability change hit is displayed. The MPU 51 stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512 when the fluctuation pattern command includes the information on the jackpot type, and stores the information on the jackpot type in the RAM 512 when determining the jackpot game effect when the jackpot game start command is received. The stored information on the jackpot type is referred to (see step S2804 in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. 33).

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the sound lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the audio lamp controller 5.

  The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like. The audio lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Note that two-way communication may be possible between the audio lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

  The MPU 61 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 61 has a built-in ROM 611 and a RAM 612. The display control device 6 also includes other circuits such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for receiving an interrupt. The MPU 61 executes processing according to a control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

  In the ROM 611, in addition to the control program, a variation design such as a main design used in the design variation display of the design display unit 341, an announcement effect image, a reach effect image, a jackpot effect image, a missed effect image, and an opening used in a jackpot game effect. A plurality of types of images such as effect images, opening / closing execution effect images, ending effect images, top menu images used in game settings, and game setting images and character setting images developed from the top menu images are stored. The images displayed on the symbol display unit 341 include a still image and a moving image. In the present embodiment, at least the reach effect image, the opening effect image, and the opening / closing execution effect image include a plurality of character effect images in which images of some or all of the prepared characters are displayed. The ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image according to the display schedule corresponding to the variable display pattern command, thereby realizing symbol variation display and effect display.

  The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit in which various information can be read and written, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 61. Note that the RAM 612 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 includes an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic device configured as a one-chip microcomputer. The MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and a RAM 712.

  The ROM 711 is a nonvolatile storage unit in which a control program and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit that can read and write various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) of processing executed by the MPU 71. Note that the RAM 712 may be a nonvolatile storage unit.

  The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

  The payout device 132, as described above, pays out game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and includes a drive unit 132a such as a motor that drives a ball stopping member that switches the presence or absence of game ball payout, And a payout sensor 132b for individually detecting game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the driving unit 132a based on the detection result of the payout sensor 132b. The payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated, for example, to eliminate the clogged ball (return to a normal state) when a payout error such as a clogged ball of the payout device 132 occurs.

  The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. The ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to an operation of a ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a predetermined amount within the range of the amount of money to be lent to a player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball rental device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71, and the predetermined number of game balls are Will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium containing an IC chip. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting the cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the driving of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 while the firing handle 22 is being rotated, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 to be fired by the firing rail 321. Feed on top. Then, the firing control IC 81 detects the operation amount of the firing handle 22 and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball firing mechanism 32 in accordance with the operation amount, so that the game ball on the shooting rail 321 is directed to the game board 31. Fire. At this time, the firing control IC 81 drives the ball feeder 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal that is turned ON / OFF at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. Thereby, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is fired toward the gaming area every 0.6 seconds.

  The firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the amount of rotation operation of the firing handle 22. Accordingly, the launch control IC 81 increases the launch intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotational operation amount of the firing handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotational operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so as to be strong.

  Further, the firing handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the firing handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to perform an operation for arbitrarily stopping the firing of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the firing handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or that the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism 32 is stopped. Thereby, for example, the firing handle 22 is fixed in a rotated state, and a game in a situation where the player does not touch the firing handle 22 is prevented. In addition, the player can stop firing of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with the thumb or the like while rotating the firing handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a +12 V voltage for driving various sensors and driving units, a +5 V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated voltage of +12 V or +5 V to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the firing control device 8, and the like.

  The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 91 is ON.

  In addition, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means that is charged by power supplied from power supply equipment. Thus, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information in the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply facility is cut off, the control device can be driven by the power discharged from the secondary battery for a predetermined period.

  Further, when the power supply control device 9 determines that the power supply has been interrupted, it inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset 24 V DC voltage based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power outage state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. Judge. When receiving the power failure signal from the power supply control device 9, the main control device 4, the sound lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7 and the like interrupt the control being executed and execute a predetermined NMI interruption process.

[Process of Main Control Unit 4]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is started up when the power is turned on, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process started periodically, and executed at the time of a power failure. It executes NMI interrupt processing and the like. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like is omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
FIG. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, every 2 msec.

<Step S1001>
First, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process of determining a detection state of a sensor or a switch connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection state of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the like is determined. At this time, when the entering of a game ball into any of the entering sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as winning detection information.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the ordinary random number counter C4, and the counter value reaches the maximum value. In this case, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes a start winning process associated with winning the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 (step S1004), and executes a firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, the launch control process is based on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and that the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. This is a process for validating the launch of. In addition, the firing control process invalidates the firing of the game ball when the touch sensor 21a detects that the player does not touch the firing handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. This is the process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch game balls when the launch of gaming balls is valid.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second operating port 315 is to be in the electric-power-open state based on the ordinary random number counter C4 stored in the electric-power holding area 412c. Execute the process. Specifically, in the through gate process, first, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the current game mode is the high frequency support mode based on the high frequency mode flag. Then, when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won when the normal random number counter C4 is 0 to 29, and deviates when the normal random number counter C4 is 30 to 249. Is determined. In addition, in the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that a normal symbol has been won when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 0 to 199, and deviates when the ordinary random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Is determined. If the MPU 41 determines that the normal symbol has been won in the through gate process, the MPU 41 keeps the electric accessory 315b open for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a game ball to the second operating port 315 at the upper right of the game board 31 on which the electric accessory 315b is juxtaposed.

<Step S1007>
In step S1007, the MPU 41 determines whether or not an error has occurred, and if an error has occurred, performs an error process to determine whether or not the error has been resolved. When an error occurs, the MPU 41 turns on an error occurrence flag stored in the RAM 412 according to the error type, and sets an error occurrence command in the RAM 412. On the other hand, when the error has been resolved, the MPU 41 sets an error flag corresponding to the resolved error type to OFF and sets an error resolution command in the RAM 412. The errors include, for example, a clogged ball error, a full tank error, a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal winning error, and a door opening error. A ball clogging error, a full tank error, and the like are classified as normal errors, and a magnet detection error, a radio wave detection error, a vibration detection error, an abnormal winning error, a door opening error, and the like are classified as fraud detection errors. In addition, a fraud detection error is positioned as an error that needs to be immediately reported after an error occurs, and a normal error is positioned as an error that does not need to be reported immediately after an error occurs.

[Start winning process]
Here, the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1101>
First, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the first operating port 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the first operating port 314 (step S1101: Yes), the processing shifts to step S1102, and determines that the game ball has not won the first operating port 314. Then (step S1101: No), the process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1106. On the other hand, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the reserved number N if the reserved number N is not the maximum reserved number (Step S1102: No) (Step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 checks the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 in FIG. 9, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later (step S1302 in FIG. 12). , And S1310), and stores the count value in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REA1 to the fourth reserved area REA4 of the first reserved storage area REA of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412. .

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 updates the content of the hit / failure information before the hit / failure information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 is subjected to the jackpot success / failure determination in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15). Confirmation is performed, and a first suspension command setting process for setting a first suspension command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a game ball has won the second operating port 315. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the game ball has won the second operating port 315 (step S1106: Yes), the processing shifts to step S1107, and determines that the game ball has not won the second operating port 315. Then (step S1106: No), the start winning process ends, and the process shifts to step S1005 in FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum number of holds (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holdings M is the maximum number of holdings (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning processing, and shifts the processing to step S1005 in FIG. On the other hand, if the number of holds M is not the maximum number of holds (step S1107: No), the MPU 41 adds 1 to the number of holds M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 obtains the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 9, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 updated in the main processing described later. Then, the counter value is stored in the first free reserved area of the first reserved area REB1 to the fourth reserved area REB4 of the second reserved storage area REB of the reserved storage area 412b in the RAM 412.

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hit / failure information for the second hold obtained in step S1109 is to be subjected to the jackpot hit / fail determination in the later-described change start process (S1408 in FIG. 13, FIG. 15). The contents are confirmed, and based on the confirmation result, a second pending command setting process for setting the second pending command in the RAM 412 is executed. Here, the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 11, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, the first hold command setting process of FIG. 11 may be replaced with “first hold command” as “second hold command” and “holding number N” as “holding number M”. Good.

[First Hold Command Setting Process]
Here, the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in FIG. 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type of the first hold command (big hit type or out of order), a variation pattern, and the number of holds N. .

<Step S1201>
In step S1201, the MPU 41 reads the number of holds N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412.

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high-probability mode. If the mode is the high-probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1203. If the mode is not the high-probability mode (step S1202) : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the mode is the high probability mode based on a high probability mode flag that can be set to ON in a game state transition process (step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12) described later. The high-probability mode flag is set to ON by the MPU 41 when shifting to the high-probability mode, and is set to OFF when shifting to the low-probability mode.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, based on the high-probability-mode hit / failure table (see FIG. 8B). Is executed. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 determines whether the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning, based on the low probability mode hit / failure table (see FIG. 8A). A determination is made as to whether or not the answer is yes.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the count value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the count value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the count value read from is not the value corresponding to the jackpot (step S1205: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the count values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the hit / fail information is stored in the third hold storage area RE3 in step S1104 of FIG. 10, the jackpot type counter C2 and the change type counter CS1 included in the hit / fail information stored in the third hold storage area RE3. Is read out. It should be noted that, among the first to fourth holding storage areas RE1 to RE4, the holding area in which the pass / fail information is stored in step S1104 in FIG. 10 is determined by the value of the holding number N stored in the holding number storage area NA. It is possible.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the number of holds N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 receiving the first hold command uses the hold number N included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize which one of the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4 corresponds to the pass / fail information stored in the first hold storage area RE1 to the fourth hold storage area RE4.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the count value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the number of holds N in the first hold command (step S1209).

  The first hold command that is set to ON in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed by the MPU 41 of the main controller 4 in step S1301 of the main process of FIG. Is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command. Furthermore, the content of the first hold command described here is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to the above description as long as the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIG. In the main process, main control processes for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game are executed. In the main processing, the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of, for example, 4 msec, and the counter updating processing of steps S1308 to S1310 is executed with the remaining time from the end of the processing of steps S1301 to S1307 to the next period. You.

<Step S1301>
First, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transmits the output data such as the command set in the main timer interrupt processing or the previous main processing of FIG. 9 to a control device such as the sub control unit 332 or the peripheral control unit 140. Execute the process. For example, in the RAM 412, commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a jackpot game end command, a variable winning port winning command, an error occurrence command, and an error clearing command are set. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. If a prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process of step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets a winning ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a winning has occurred in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, and the like. Then, when a prize is generated, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. If the MPU 41 determines that a winning has occurred in the variable winning opening 316 based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412, the MPU 41 sets a variable winning opening winning command in the RAM 412. This variable winning opening winning command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output processing in step S1301 of the main processing. Thereby, the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 can cause the symbol display unit 341 to display the payout number of the game balls (payout display) in the big hit game.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling a game in the variable game. Although the details of the variable game control process will be described later, in the variable game control process, the above-described jackpot lottery is executed, and a variable pattern command required for symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. At this time, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process in FIG. 9, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in steps S1302 and S1310. Is set in the RAM 412 on the basis of the respective values of.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. Although the details of the jackpot game control process will be described later, in the jackpot game control process, by controlling the opening and closing of the opening / closing door 316b, a round game in which a game ball can enter the variable winning opening 316 is performed a plurality of times. Execute. Thereby, the player can acquire many game balls in the jackpot game.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for transitioning the game state based on the determination result of the jackpot lottery in step S1604 in the change start process of FIG. In the game state transition processing, the MPU 41 changes the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a jackpot game state having an open / close execution mode, a probable change time short game state which is a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode, a low probability mode and a high frequency The game mode is shifted to a normal time saving game state that is a support mode, a normal non-time saving game state that is a low probability mode and is not a high frequency support mode, or the like.

  For example, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state after the end of the variable game for the jackpot, and executes the jackpot game having the open / close execution mode. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game start flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. On the other hand, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the big hit game has ended based on whether or not the big hit game end flag set in step S1722 in the big hit game control process of FIG. 16 described later is on. If it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state.

  More specifically, the 5R probability variable jackpot flag, 16R probability variable jackpot flag, or 5R regular jackpot flag set in steps S1607, S1608, or S1609 in the variation start process of FIG. In the case of, by setting the big hit game start flag to ON, the game state after the end of the variable game for the big hit is shifted to the big hit game state.

  Further, after the big hit game is over, the MPU 41 changes the game state from the big hit game state to a predetermined game state based on which of the aforementioned 5R certain variable big hit flag, 16R certain variable big hit flag and 5R normal big hit flag is set to ON. Transition to the state. For example, when the 5R probability changing jackpot flag or the 16R probability changing jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the jackpot game state to the short-change time short game state. When the 5R normal big hit flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 shifts the game state from the big hit game state to the normal time short game state.

  Further, when shifting the transition of the gaming state, the MPU 41 sets the gaming state flag for the gaming state after the transition to ON. For example, the MPU 41 sets the high-probability mode flag to ON when the game state is shifted to the probable-change time-short game state, and sets the time-saving mode flag to ON when the game state is shifted to the normal time-short game state. I do. When the time saving mode flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 sets the number of time savings (50 times or 100 times) set in advance as the number of executions of the variable game in the time saving mode in the time saving counter. On the other hand, when the gaming state is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state, the MPU 41 changes the jackpot flag set to on among the 5R certain jackpot flag, the 16R certain jackpot flag, and the 5R regular jackpot flag. Set to off.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes a display control process of the main display unit 37. With this display control process, the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 in the main display unit 37 execute the symbol variation display only during the variation display time corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the symbol variation display is a symbol indicating the lottery result. It will be stopped and displayed. In addition, by the display control process, each LED lamp is blinked by the LED pair 371 in the main display unit 37 only for a predetermined normal symbol fluctuation display time, and whether or not the normal symbol has been won is turned on and off by the pair of LED lamps. This is indicated by a lighting pattern that is a combination of In addition, in the case of the normal symbol winning, the electric accessory 315b attached to the second operating port 315 is opened for a predetermined time.

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has come (step S1308: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1301, and executes each process from S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1308: No), the MPU 41 waits until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. Until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (Step S1308: Yes), Step S1308, Step S1309, and Step S1310 are repeatedly executed during the remaining time until the end.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 updates the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variation type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, after updating the fluctuation type counter CS1, the MPU 41 returns the processing to step S1308.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, the variable game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1304 of the main process of FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1401>
In step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is playing a big hit game. If the big game is being played (step S1401: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process and is not playing a big hit game. In this case (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. For example, whether or not the big hit game is executed is determined based on the big hit game execution flag that the MPU 41 sets to ON at the start of the big hit game and turns OFF at the end of the big hit game. In addition, when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game, the MPU 41 sets a big hit game start command in the RAM 412 and transmits the big hit game start command to the audio ramp control device 5. On the other hand, when the jackpot game start flag is set to off at the end of the jackpot game, the MPU 41 sets a jackpot game end command in the RAM 412 and transmits the jackpot game end command to the audio lamp control device 5.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed. If the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed. (Step S1402: No), the process proceeds to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation display is being performed is set to ON in step S1614 of the variation start process in FIG. 15 described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the variation game process is performed. The determination is made based on the variable display flag that is set to off in step S1405.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable display time has elapsed since the start of the symbol variable display. If it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variable game control process ends.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
If the variable display time has elapsed (Step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 stops and displays the symbol corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the 7-segment display 372, 373 of the main display unit 37 ( In step S1404, the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
If the symbol variation display is not being performed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 determines the number of holds N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold number storage area NAA of the hold number storage area NAB of the hold number storage area 412b. It is determined whether both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the hold number N and the hold number M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, if any one of the number of hold N and the number of hold M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the success / failure information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the processing in step S1407 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to perform a variation display based on the winning / failure information stored in the execution area AE, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the change start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, an example of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1501>
In step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the number of holdings M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the number of holdings M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1502. I do. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds N stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the contact information of the second reservation area REA2 is moved to the first reservation area REA1, the contact information of the third reservation area REA3 is moved to the second reservation area REA2, and the contact information of the fourth reservation area REA4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the processing in step S1504 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Steps S1505 to S1507>
Step S1505 is executed when the number of holdings M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 is executed when both or one of the number of holdings M and the number of holdings N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: Yes). Therefore, when the number of holds M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 determines that the number of holds N is not 0, and executes the processing of steps S1505 to S1507.

  Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the number of holds M stored in the number-of-holds storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the success / failure information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (Step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the contact information of the second reservation area REB2 is moved to the first reservation area REB1, the contact information of the third reservation area REB3 is moved to the second reservation area REB2, and the contact information of the fourth reservation area REB4 is moved. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the processing in step S1507 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1508.

<Step S1508 and Step S1509>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the time-saving mode flag set to on in the game state transition process in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12 is set to on, and sets the time-saving mode flag to on. If yes (step S1508: YES), the counter value of the time reduction counter is decremented by 1 (step S1509). On the other hand, when the time saving mode flag is set to off (step S1508: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1512.

<Steps S1510 and S1511>
In step S1510, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510). Here, when the counter value of the time reduction counter is 0 (step S1510: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the time reduction mode flag to off (step S1511), and shifts the processing to step S1512. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 (step S1510: No), the process proceeds to step S1512 without setting the time reduction mode flag to off.

<Step S1512>
In step S1512, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a shift command indicating that the hit / fail information of the first to fourth holding areas REA1 to REA4 or the first to fourth holding areas REB4 has shifted. Then, the shift command set in this step S1512 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the processing in step S1512 ends, the MPU 41 ends the data setting processing, and shifts the processing to step S1408 in FIG.

[Change start processing]
Here, an example of the change start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 in FIG. 13 will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1601>
The MPU 41 determines whether or not the high-probability mode flag set to on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12 is set to on (step S1601), and the high-probability mode flag is turned on. Is set (Step S1601: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S1602, and if the high probability mode flag is set to Off (Step S1601: No), the process proceeds to Step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
If the high-probability mode flag is set to ON (step S1601: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is based on the high-probability mode hit / failure table (see FIG. 8B). Is determined as to whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the above is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1602). On the other hand, when the high probability mode flag is set to off (step S1601: No), the MPU 41 is currently stored in the execution area AE based on the low probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 8A). It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included in the hit information is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1603).

<Steps S1604 to S1610>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the result of the success / failure determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a jackpot. If the result of the hit determination is a jackpot (step S1604: YES), the jackpot type is determined (steps S1605 and S1606). Specifically, the MPU 41 determines that the jackpot type is 5R sure-change jackpot based on the jackpot type counter C2 included in the hit / fail information currently stored in the execution area AE and the distribution table (see FIG. 8C). Is determined (step S1605), and it is determined whether or not it is a 16R probability change jackpot (step S1606).

  When the jackpot type is the 5R-variable jackpot (step S1605: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 5R-variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1607). The 5R probability change jackpot flag indicates whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R probability change jackpot. Also, in step S1607, the result of stopping the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the result of the jackpot lottery is the 5R probability variable jackpot is also set based on the hit / fail information. In addition, the 5R certain change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1607 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is the 16R probability variable jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the 16R probability variable jackpot flag to ON (step S1608). The 16R probability change jackpot flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit / failure information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 16R probability change jackpot. In step S1608, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability-change jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. It should be noted that the 16R certain change big hit flag is set to off at the end of the change start processing. When the processing in step S1608 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  When the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot (step S1605: No, step S1606: No), the MPU 41 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag provided in the RAM 412 to ON (step S1609). The 5R normal big hit flag indicates whether or not the result of the big hit lottery of the hit / wrong information currently stored in the execution area AE is a 5R normal big hit. In step S1609, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is the 5R normal jackpot is also set based on the hit / failure information. When the processing in step S1609 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

  The MPU 41 can determine the jackpot type based on the jackpot flag set to ON in any of steps S1607 to S1609, and determines the number of round games (the number of rounds) executed in the open / close execution mode. You can judge.

  On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is not a jackpot (step S1604: NO), the MPU 41 sets the disconnection flag to ON (step S1610). The outlier flag indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery of the hit information currently stored in the execution area AE is outlier. In step S1610, the stop result of the main display unit 37 in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not set is also set based on the hit / failure information. Note that the off flag is set to off at the end of the change start process. When the processing in step S1610 ends, the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1611.

<Step S1611>
In step S1611, the MPU 41 sets the variable display time of the variable display time counter on the 7-segment displays 372 and 373 of the main display unit 37 corresponding to the variable pattern of the variable game. Specifically, when the normal big hit flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the change pattern based on the change type counter CS1 and the normal big hit change table (see FIG. 8E). In addition, when the 5R probability variable jackpot flag or the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 8F). Further, when the deviation flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 8 (G)).

<Step S1612>
In step S1612, the MPU 41 sets, in the RAM 412, a fluctuation pattern command including a lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the fluctuation game and the fluctuation pattern specified in step S1611. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 12) executed by the MPU 41, the variation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice ramp control device 5 displays a symbol based on the variation pattern command. The symbol variation display and the like by the unit 341 are executed.

  Note that, as described above, when the lottery result is “normal jackpot”, the MPU 41 assigns “A01” to “A01” to “V” indicating that there is a 5R normal jackpot to the variation patterns “01” to “03”. A03 ”is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects any one of “B01” to “B03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” have “B” indicating that it is a 5R probable jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, the MPU 41 selects one of “C01” to “C03” in which the variation patterns “01” to “03” are appended with “C” indicating that it is a 16R probability change jackpot. Is set in the RAM 412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is “out”, the MPU 41 changes any one of “D01” to “D08” with “D” indicating that it is out of the fluctuation patterns “01” to “08”. It is set in the RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is “missing”, the MPU 41 includes information on any of the reach out of front and rear, the reach other than the back and forth out of reach, and complete out of reach in the variation pattern command.

<Steps S1613 and S1614>
The MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display on the main display unit 37 (step S1613), and sets the variation display flag to ON (step S1614). The symbol variation display started here stops after the variation display time set in step S1611 has elapsed, with the stop result set in any of steps S1607 to S1610.

<Steps S1615 and S1616>
In step S1615, the MPU 41 determines whether the disconnection flag is set to on. If the disconnection flag is set to on (step S1615: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the disconnection flag to off (step S1616), and ends the change start processing. On the other hand, when the disconnection flag is set to off (step S1615: No), the MPU 41 ends the change start processing.

  In the change start process, the jackpot flags that are set on in steps S1607 to S1609 are not set to off, and these jackpot flags are set in the jackpot game control process (step S1305) in the main process of FIG. And is set to OFF when the round game number R corresponding to the jackpot type is set in step S1703 in the jackpot game control process.

[Big hit game control process]
Here, an example of the jackpot game control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1305 in FIG. 12 will be described with reference to FIG. In the big hit game control process, control for executing a round game in which game balls can enter the variable winning opening 316 a plurality of times is executed. FIG. 17A is a time chart showing an example of a 5R jackpot game, and FIG. 17B is a time chart showing an example of a 16R jackpot game. Hereinafter, an example of the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game will be described with reference to FIGS. 17A and 17B, and then the jackpot game control processing will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 17A and 17B, the 5R jackpot game and the 16R jackpot game include an opening, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending.

  The opening is a period from the transition to the jackpot gaming state to the start of the open / close execution mode. In the opening, for example, the type of jackpot (the number of rounds, whether or not it is a probability change) is indicated or indicated, and the number of consecutive games is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, and the operation method of the firing handle 22 in the jackpot game is displayed. Is indicated.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, a round game is executed a number of times corresponding to the type of big hit. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17 (A), a 5R jackpot game in which a round game is executed five times in the case of a 5R probability variable jackpot and a 5R regular jackpot is performed, and as shown in FIG. A 16R jackpot game in which a round game is executed 16 times in the case of a probability change jackpot is performed.

  Here, the round game is a game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened. In the round game, the variable winning opening 316 is closed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or when a predetermined number or more (for example, 9 or more) game balls win the variable winning opening 316. Further, in the present embodiment, an interval (for example, 1.5 seconds) in which the closed state of the variable winning opening 316 is maintained for a predetermined time is provided between round games in the open / close execution mode. That is, the open / close execution mode is executed in the order of round game → interval → round game → interval → round game... → round game. However, in the open / close execution mode, it is not always necessary to set the interval. For example, the interval may be substantially eliminated by immediately opening the variable winning opening 316 immediately after the closing of the variable winning opening 316, or a plurality of variable winning openings 316 may be provided, and these variable winning openings 316 may be alternately arranged. Intervals may be substantially eliminated by opening to the second.

  The ending is a period from the end of the open / close execution mode to the end of the big hit game. In the ending, the symbol display section 341 suggests or specifies a game state to be shifted to after the big hit game ends. However, in the present embodiment, in the ending, the game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game is not suggested, and the game state of the transfer destination, that is, the probable changing short game state that is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the low probability The mode and the high-frequency support mode, ie, the normal time saving game state, are clearly indicated. In addition, in the ending, in general, information relating to payouts such as the number of jackpots, the number of payouts in the jackpot game, and the total number of payouts during the consecutive play is displayed on the symbol display section 341.

<Step S1701>
Returning to the description of FIG. 16, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether the big hit game start flag set to on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. It is determined whether to start. When the big hit game start flag is set to ON (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1702, and when the big hit game start flag is set to OFF (step S1701: No), the processing is performed. Shifts to step S1706.

<Step S1702>
When starting the big hit game (step S1701: Yes), the MPU 41 sets a big hit game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1702). This jackpot game start command is transmitted to the sound ramp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can determine the jackpot game effect to be executed by the symbol display unit 341 or the speaker 26 (step S2707 in FIG. 30, FIG. 33) and start the jackpot game effect (FIG. 44). Steps S3201 to S3206).

<Step S1703>
In step S1703, the MPU 41 sets the number R of round games to be executed in the open / close execution mode based on the jackpot flag set to ON in any one of steps S1607 to S1609 in the change start process in FIG. For example, the MPU 41 stores the number R of round games as “5” in the RAM 412 when the big hit flag is the 5R certain variable big hit flag (step S1607 in FIG. 15) or the 5R normal big hit flag (step S1609 in FIG. 15). On the other hand, the MPU 41 stores the number R of round games as “16” in the RAM 412 when the jackpot flag is the 16R probability-change jackpot flag (Step S1608 in FIG. 15). As a result, the MPU 41 executes a round game of the number R of round games according to the jackpot type in the opening / closing execution mode control processing in step S1714 described later. When the round game number R in the open / close execution mode is set, the MPU 41 turns off the big hit flag that has been set on.

<Step S1704 and Step S1705>
In step S1704, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot start flag to off and further sets the opening flag to on (step S1705). The opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1706, which will be described later, and the MPU 41 grasps the timing to start the open / close execution mode based on the opening flag.

<Step S1706>
In step S1706, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening flag set to on in step S1705 is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether the opening has been started. If the opening flag is set to ON (step S1706: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1707. If the opening flag is set to OFF (step S1706: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1713. Transition.

<Step S1707>
When the opening flag is set to ON (step S1706: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time for starting the clocking in step S1708 to be described later is to be measured when starting the opening. (Step S1707). If the opening time is being measured (step S1707: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1709, and if the opening time is not being counted (step S1707: NO), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1708.

<Step S1708>
In step S1708, the MPU 41 starts measuring the opening time from the start of the opening, and ends the jackpot game control process. The opening time measured in step S1708 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining in step S1709 to be described later whether to end the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode.

<Step S1709>
In step S1709, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the opening time at which timing is started in step S1708 has reached a predetermined time required for executing the opening. If the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1710, and if the opening time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1709: No), the big hit game control processing To end.

<Steps S1710 to S1712>
When the opening time has reached the predetermined time (step S1709: YES), the MPU 41 sets the opening flag to OFF (step S1710), ends the timing of the opening time (step S1711), and sets the opening / closing execution mode flag. It is set to ON (step S1712). Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the opening and shift to the open / close execution mode. The open / close execution mode flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1713 described below, and the MPU 41 executes the open / close execution process (step S1714) described later when the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON.

<Step S1713>
In step S1713, the MPU 41 determines whether the open / close execution mode flag set to on in step S1712 is set to on. When the open / close execution mode flag is set to ON (step S1713: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1714, and when the open / close execution mode flag is set to OFF (step S1713: No), the process proceeds. Shifts to step S1715.

<Step S1714>
In step S1714, the MPU 41 executes an open / close execution mode control process. In the opening / closing execution mode control process, the MPU 41 executes the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened a plurality of times according to the type of big hit. The details of the open / close execution mode control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1715>
In step S1715, the MPU 41 determines whether the ending flag set in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process in FIG. 18 described later is set to on. If the ending flag is set to ON (step S1715: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1716, and if the ending flag is set to OFF (step S1715: NO), the big hit game control process To end.

<Step S1716>
When the ending flag is set to ON (step S1715: YES), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which the clocking is started in step S1717 to be described later is starting when the ending is started. (Step S1716). If the ending time is being counted (step S1716: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1719. If the ending time is not counted (step S1716: No), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1717.

<Steps S1717 and S1718>
In step S1717, the MPU 41 starts counting the ending time after starting the ending, sets an ending start command in the RAM 412 (step S1718), and ends the jackpot game control process. The ending time measured in step S1717 is referred to by the MPU 41 when determining whether to end the ending (big hit game) in step S1719 described below.

<Step S1719>
In step S1719, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ending time at which time counting is started in step S1717 has reached a predetermined time required for executing the ending. When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1720, and when the ending time has not reached the predetermined time (step S1719: No), the big hit game control processing To end.

<Steps S1720 to S1722>
When the ending time has reached the predetermined time (step S1719: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the ending flag that is set on in step S1809 in the opening / closing execution mode control process in FIG. (S1720), the counting of the ending time is ended (step S1721), and the big hit game end flag is set to ON (step S1722). Thereby, the MPU 41 can end the ending, that is, the big hit game. The big hit end flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 12, and when the big hit end flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 Is shifted from the jackpot gaming state to another gaming state (in the present embodiment, to the probable variable time saving gaming state or the normal time saving gaming state).

<Step S1723>
In step S1723, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot end command in the RAM 412, and ends the jackpot game control process. The jackpot end command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. Thereby, the sound lamp control device 5 can end the jackpot game effect on the symbol display unit 341 and the speaker 26 (see steps S2715 and S2716 in FIG. 30 and steps S3215 to S3217 in FIG. 44).

[Opening / closing execution mode control processing]
Here, an example of the open / close execution mode control process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1714 in the big hit game control process of FIG. 16 will be described with reference to FIG. In the opening / closing execution mode control process, the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is executed a plurality of times according to the jackpot type as described above.

<Step S1801>
In step S1801, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening opening flag set to on in step S1804 of the opening / closing execution mode control process is set to on. That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variable winning opening 316 is being opened. When the variable winning opening flag is set to ON (step S1801: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1802, and when the variable winning opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No). The process moves to step S1810.

<Step S1802>
In step S1802, the MPU 41 determines whether a condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the variable winning opening 316 was opened, or whether the number of game balls winning the variable winning opening 316 exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 9). Determine whether or not. When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied (step S1802: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1803, and when the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is not satisfied. (Step S1802: No), the open / close execution mode control process ends.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the condition for closing the variable winning opening 316 is satisfied (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 closes the variable winning opening 316 (step S1803), and further sets the variable winning opening opening flag to off (step S1803). Step S1804).

<Steps S1805 and S1806>
In step S1805, the MPU 41 subtracts one from the number R of round games stored in the RAM 412, and then determines whether or not the number R of round games after subtraction is “0” (step S1806). If the round game number R after the subtraction is “0” (step S1805: YES), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1808, and if the round game number R after the subtraction is not “0” (step S1806: No) ) And the process moves to step S1807.

<Step S1807>
If the round game number R after the subtraction is not “0” (step S1806: No), the MPU 41 starts measuring an interval time until the next round game is executed (step S1807), and the open / close execution mode control process To end. The interval time at which time measurement is started in step S1807 is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1810 to be described later to determine whether to open the variable winning opening 316.

<Steps S1808 and S1809>
If the round game number R after the subtraction is “0” (step S1805: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the open / close execution mode flag to off (step S1808), and further sets the ending flag to on (step S1809). Then, the open / close execution mode control process ends. The ending flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1715 in the jackpot game control process in FIG. 16 to determine whether to start ending.

<Step S1810>
If the variable winning opening opening flag is set to OFF (step S1801: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the interval time at which time measurement is started in step S1807 exceeds a predetermined time, that is, ends the interval. Then, it is determined whether or not to start the round game (step S1810). If the interval time has exceeded the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the processing to step S1811. If the interval time has not exceeded the predetermined time (step S1810: No), the MPU 41 performs the open / close execution mode control processing. To end.

<Steps S1811 to S1813>
If the interval time exceeds the predetermined time (step S1810: Yes), the MPU 41 opens the variable winning opening 316 (step S1811), and turns on the variable winning opening flag indicating whether the variable winning opening 316 is open. It is set (step S1812). The variable winning opening flag is referred to by the MPU 41 in step S1801 described above. At this time, the MPU 41 sets a round game start command in the RAM 412 (step S1813), and ends the open / close execution mode control process. This round game start command is to notify the sound ramp control device 5 of starting a round game (opening the variable winning opening 316) and of what round the round game is. Are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, the processing executed by the MPU 51 in the audio ramp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  Note that another or another embodiment in which part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the audio lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 is also conceivable. Further, in the audio lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes a control process of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, a startup process when the audio lamp control device 5 is started, an NMI interrupt process in the case of a power failure, and the like. The description of those processes is omitted.

[Sub timer interrupt processing of voice ramp control device 5]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of the sub timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51. The MPU 51 executes, for example, a sub timer interrupt process as a periodic process with a 1 msec cycle.

  As shown in FIG. 19, in the sub-timer interrupt processing, the MPU 51 detects an operation button operation detection processing (step S1901), an operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1902), a selection button operation detection processing (step S1903), and a selection operation detection. Pattern determination processing (step S1904), determination button operation detection processing (step S1905), determination operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1906), counter update processing (step S1907), game setting processing (step S1908), command determination processing (step (S1909), error processing (step S1910), variable game effect processing (step S1911), and jackpot game effect processing (step S1912).

[Operation button operation detection processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process (step S1901) in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the operation detection process, the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history of the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection processing is executed by the MPU 51, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub timer interrupt processing. Will be determined.

<Steps S2001 to S2003>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S2001, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. In step S2002, the MPU 51 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. Then, in step S2003, the MPU 51 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a to the third detection flag, and ends the operation detection processing.

  As described above, in the operation button operation detection processing, the processing states of steps S2001 to S2003 are executed, so that the operation states of the three most recent operations at 1 msec intervals as the operation history of the operation button 20 are the first detection flag to the third detection state. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the immediately preceding operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the immediately previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1902) in the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the operation detection pattern determination process, an operation pattern for determining the operation state of the operation button 20 from the operation history of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag Set a flag. The operation pattern flags include first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by a combination of ON and OFF of the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, as shown in FIG. 22A, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 is continued. When only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been started. When only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has been completed. If all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation on the operation button 20 has not been performed.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2102 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S2101: Yes), and executes the processing when the first operation detection flag is off (step S2101: No). The process moves to step S2105.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2103 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2102: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2102: No). It moves to step S2108.

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2104 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2103: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2103: No). The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2104>
In step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag on, sets the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 can determine that the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued when the operation pattern of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times. Then, the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). Then, the first operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continued.

<Step S2105>
When the MPU 51 determines that the first operation detection flag is off in step S2101 (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Is determined (step S2105). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2106 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S2105: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2105: No). The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2107 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2106: Yes), and executes the processing when the third operation detection flag is off (step S2106: No). The process moves to step S2110.

<Step S2107>
In step S2107, the MPU 51 sets the second operation pattern flag on, sets the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times (operation state). Has been started), the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first and third operation pattern flags are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the start of operation of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the start of operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2108>
When the MPU 51 determines that the second operation detection flag is off in Step S2102 (Step S2102: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the most recent operation button 20 is on. (Step S2108). Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2110 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S2108: Yes), and executes the processing when the second operation detection flag is off (step S2108: No). The process moves to step S2109.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON, sets the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag to OFF, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 changes the operation button 20 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times (operation state). Is completed), the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to OFF (see FIG. 22A). The third operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). As described above, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state using the third operation pattern flag, the operation state of the operation button 20 for three times is reflected. Or, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the end of the operation of the operation button 20 is not reflected on the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S2110>
In step S2110, the MPU 51 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination processing. That is, the MPU 51 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, occurs as the operation state of the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 22A). When all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 is in the non-operation state.

[Selection button operation detection processing]
In the selection button operation detection process (step S1903 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 executes an upper selection button operation process, a lower selection button operation process, a left selection button operation process, and a right selection button operation process.

<Up selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 20, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “up selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Lower selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 20, and thus a detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “lower selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213, and executes processing for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the left selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 20, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “left selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection processing in FIG.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the past three operation histories. Here, the right selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing in FIG. 20, and therefore, detailed description is omitted. In the right selection button operation process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “right selection operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process in FIG.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination processing (step S1904 in FIG. 19), the MPU 51 performs the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing. Execute.

<Upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines the upper selection button 211 from the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. An upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the selection button 211 is set. Here, the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. 21, the “operation detection flag” is set to “upper selection operation detection flag”, and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “upper selection operation pattern”. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the upper selection button 211 three times. If it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing, so the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the upper selection button 211 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 for three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been started, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the upper selection button 211 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been completed, the third upper selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has ended). Used.

  When an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state.

<Lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the lower selection button from the operation history of the lower selection button 212 determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the key 212 is set. Here, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “lower selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “lower selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22C, in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the operation states of the lower selection button 212 for three times. When it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continuing, so the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 is continued.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the state of the lower selection button 212 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been started, the second lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the operation state of the lower selection button 212 from the operation state to the non-operation state when an operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 for three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been completed, the third lower selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has ended). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the lower selection button 212 is not operated.

<Left selection operation detection pattern determination process>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the left selection button from the operation history of the left selection button 213 determined based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the 213 is set. Here, the left selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “left selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “left selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are three operation states of the left selection button 213. If it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing, so the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. The first left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the left selection button 213 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been started, the second left selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the left selection button 213 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been completed, the third left selection operation pattern flag is set on, and the first left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag are set off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the left selection button 213 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). Used.

  In addition, when an operation pattern other than the above such as “OFF”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. When all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the left selection button 213 is not operated.

<Right selection operation detection pattern determination processing>
In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the right selection button from the operation history of the right selection button 214 determined based on the first right selection operation detection flag, the second right selection operation detection flag, and the right selection operation detection flag. The right operation pattern flag for determining the operation state of the operation pattern 214 is set. Here, the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” is set to “right selection operation detection flag” and the “operation pattern flag” is set to “right selection operation pattern” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG. Flag ".

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 determines that the operation patterns of “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” are the three operation states of the right selection button 214. If it occurs, it can be determined that the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing, so the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set. Set to off. The first right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the right selection button 214 from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, “ON” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been started, the second right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). Used.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the right selection button 214 from the operation state to the non-operation state when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Since it can be determined that the operation has been completed, the third right selection operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has ended). Used.

  Further, when an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, “OFF”, etc. occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times, the MPU 51 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags. Set all to off. Note that, when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the right selection button 214 is in a non-operation state.

[OK button operation detection process]
In the determination button operation detection processing, the MPU 51 detects the operation state of the determination button 21B and executes processing for sequentially updating the operation histories for the past three times. Here, the determination button operation detection processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 20, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the determination button operation detection process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with the “determination button operation detection flag” in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG.

[Determination operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 51 determines the operation state of the determination button 21B based on the operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. Set an operation pattern flag for determining. Here, the determination operation detection pattern determination processing is the same as the operation detection pattern determination processing in FIG. 21, and thus detailed description is omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the “operation detection flag” may be replaced with “determination operation detection flag” in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process in FIG.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination processing, the MPU 51 generates the operation patterns “ON”, “ON”, and “ON” as the three operation states of the determination button 21B. In this case, since it can be determined that the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The first determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

  Further, the MPU 51 changes the non-operation state from the non-operation state to the operation state when the operation pattern of “OFF”, “ON”, and “ON” occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times (operation state). Has been started), the second decision operation pattern flag is set to on, and the first decision operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag are set to off. The second determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been started). .

  Further, when the operation pattern of “ON”, “OFF”, and “OFF” occurs as the operation state of the determination button 21B for three times, the MPU 51 changes the determination button 21B from the operation state to the non-operation state (operation Is completed), the third determination operation pattern flag is set to ON, and the first determination operation pattern flag and the second determination operation pattern flag are set to OFF. The third determination operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the determination button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the determination button 21B has been completed). .

  When an operation pattern other than the above, such as “OFF”, “OFF”, or “OFF”, is generated as the three operation states of the determination button 21B, the MPU 51 sets all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags. Set to off. When all of the first to third determination operation pattern flags are off, the MPU 51 determines that the determination button 21B is in the non-operation state.

[Counter update processing]
Here, returning to the description of FIG. 19, in the counter update process (step S1907), the MPU 51 updates the effect type counter, the variation display counter, and the scenario type counter. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The effect type counter updated here is used to determine the change type and the effect type based on the change pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. On the other hand, the MPU 51 decrements the variable display counter by one. This variable display counter is for measuring the variable display time of the symbol display section 341. The counter value of the variable display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining variable display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the variable display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining variable display time, that the variable display is in progress, that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 has ended, and the like. In the present embodiment, for example, the variable display counter determines whether or not the variable display of the main symbol has been started on the symbol display unit 341 in step S2301 in FIG. 26, step S2401 in FIG. 27, step S2501 in FIG. 28, and step S2601 in FIG. It is referred to when judging. Further, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter value of the scenario type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The scenario type counter updated here is used to determine the effect scenario type of the opening / closing execution mode effect in the big hit game effect (see step S2805 in FIG. 33). For example, the scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199.

[Game setting process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting process (step S1908 in FIG. 19). In the game setting process, during a period in which the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect are not executed, the jackpot is determined according to the operation of the selection determining unit 21 (the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211 to 214) and the determination button 21B) by the player. A game setting for a game effect and a variable game effect is performed. In the present embodiment, a character setting for selecting a character in a variable game effect from a plurality of characters (subjects) as a game setting will be described. Hereinafter, the character selected by the character setting is referred to as “selected character” (specific selection subject). The selected character image (selected subject image) 714 corresponding to the selected character includes a fluctuating game performance and a fluctuating stop state (a fluctuating stop screen to be described later), except for a case where a specific effect including, for example, a super reach effect and a special reach effect is performed. 72 (see FIG. 25 (A)), it is displayed in a partial area (for example, lower right corner, lower left corner, lower part, etc.) of the symbol display section 341. In addition, the selected character image 714 is displayed with a higher priority than other characters in a predetermined effect (for example, cut-in effect, step-up effect, mini-character effect), or the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is higher than the other characters. It is also conceivable that it is displayed as an effect with a high expectation of being a big hit.

  Before describing the game setting process shown in FIG. 23, a transition example of the display screen in the game setting process will be described first with reference to FIGS. In the following description, for the sake of simplicity, the display does not shift to a later-described top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B), a demonstration screen, or a power saving screen even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main symbol 715 was stopped. The following description is based on the assumption that a fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) described later is maintained, and that a game can be set after a predetermined period of time elapses after the change stop screen 71 is displayed. Of course, the game setting may be enabled immediately after the change stop screen 71 is displayed, and when a predetermined time has elapsed after the change stop screen 71 is displayed, the game is automatically set regardless of the operation of the player. The display screen may shift from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B).

  As shown in FIG. 24, the display screen shifts to at least a fluctuation stop screen 71, a top menu screen 72, a game setting screen 73, and a character selection screen 74 in response to an operation on the selection determining unit 21 by the player, and the first operation is performed. The display shifts to the variable display screen 75 in which the main symbol 715 is displayed in a variable manner by the winning of the game ball to the opening 314 or the second operating port 315.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (A), when the variable display of the main symbol 715 is stopped, the number of hold N and the number of hold M are “0”, and the change stop screen 71 is in the jackpot game state. This is a screen in which the state in which the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is stopped when not shifting is maintained. In the present embodiment, on the fluctuation stop screen 71, the selected character image 714 is displayed at the lower right corner of the fluctuation stop screen 71. The change stop screen 71 also shifts to a case where “end” is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (B), the top menu screen 72 is a screen that shifts from any of the fluctuation stop screen 71, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74. Specifically, for example, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed, the top menu screen 72 is “returned by one” on the game setting screen 73 by the player. Is selected, and when "return to top menu" is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74. The display screen may shift from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72 when an operation unit other than the operation button 20 such as the determination button 21B of the selection determination unit 21 is operated.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 25B, the top menu screen 72 includes a plurality of selection images 721 to 725, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727.

  The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are images that show a plurality of selectable items and allow the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. Further, the plurality of selection images 721 to 725 are also images for selecting a display screen of a migration destination. The plurality of selection images 721 to 725 include a selection image 723 of “game setting customization”, a selection image 725 of “end”, and the like. The selection image 723 of “game setting customization” is for shifting from the top menu screen 72 to a game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) for performing a game setting in the variable game and the jackpot game. 24). The “end” selection image 725 is for shifting the display screen from the top menu screen 72 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

  The cursor image 726 is an image indicating a temporarily selected item. In addition, the temporarily selected image (the selected image 723 of “game setting customization” in FIG. 25B) includes other selected images 721, 722, 724 to emphasize that the image is temporarily selected. 725 is displayed in a manner distinguishable from 725.

  The selection determining unit image 727 is an image simulating the selection determining unit 21 (see FIG. 1), and is an image indicating that a desired item can be selected from a plurality of items by operating the selection determining unit 21. In the selection determination section image 727, the characters “select” are added to the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, and the images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 are highlighted. Is displayed. The images corresponding to the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212 may be emphasized by blinking display or the like. In addition, in the selection determining section image 727, the character corresponding to the determination button 21B is appended with the word "determination", indicating that the determination button 21B should be operated when selecting the provisionally selected item. The display example of the selection determining section image 727 is not limited to the mode shown in FIG. 25B, and can be appropriately changed.

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (C), the game setting screen 73 is a screen shifted from the top menu screen 72 or the character selection screen 74. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 shifts to a case where “game setting customization” is selected by the player on the top menu screen 72 and a case where “return one” is selected by the player on the character selection screen 74. I do.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 25C, the game setting screen 73 includes a plurality of selection images 731 to 735, a cursor image 726, and a selection determination unit image 727. Note that the cursor image 726 and the selection determining unit image 727 are the same as those in the case of the top menu screen 72, and thus description thereof is omitted. In the following, when the cursor image 726 and the selection determination unit image 727 on the top menu screen 72 are the same, the same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 are images for displaying a plurality of selectable items (display screens at the transition destination) and for allowing the player to select a desired item from the plurality of items. The plurality of selection images 731 to 735 include a selection image 733 of “character selection”, a selection image 734 of “return one”, and a selection image 735 of “end”.

  The selection image 733 of “character selection” is displayed on the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25 (D)) for selecting the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25 (A)) in the variable game effect from the game setting screen 73. )) (See FIG. 24). The “return one” selection image 734 is for shifting the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selection image 735 is for shifting the display screen from the game setting screen 73 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

  As shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 (D), the character selection screen 74 is a screen shifted from the game setting screen 73. Specifically, the game setting screen 73 shifts to a case where “character selection” is selected by the player on the game setting screen 73.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 25D, the character selection screen 74 includes a plurality of selection images 741 to 748, a temporary selection frame image 749, and a selection determination unit image 727. The plurality of selection images 741 to 748 include a plurality of character selection images 741 to 745, a “return one” selection image 746, a “return to top menu” selection image 747, and an “end” selection image 748.

  The plurality of character selection images 741 to 745 are images that allow the player to select a selected character to be displayed as the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A). In the present embodiment, 20 characters (character 1 to character 20) are prepared for the floating game effect and the jackpot game effect, and 9 of the characters (character 1 to character 9) are selected by the player. Thus, it is possible to display as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A). Of course, a selected character to be displayed as the selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A) may be selected from all the characters prepared for the variable game effect and the big hit game effect.

  Further, on the character selection screen 74, five of the nine characters that can be selected are simultaneously displayed, the character arranged at the center is displayed largest, and the characters are displayed smaller as the distance from the center increases. . These five characters are changed by operating the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 so that the characters 1 to 9 are scrolled left and right. Of course, the number of characters simultaneously displayed on the character selection screen 74 is not limited to five, but may be any number of one or more, and all selectable characters may be displayed simultaneously. When a plurality of characters are simultaneously displayed on the character selection screen 74, all the characters may be displayed in the same size.

  The temporary selection frame image 749 is an image indicating that the character is selectable by operating the enter button 21B, and is displayed so as to surround the character selection image. In FIG. 25 (D), the character 1 displayed at the center is a character that is provisionally selected. The display position of the temporarily selected frame image 749 is fixed, and the position is not changed by an operation on the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214. When a plurality of characters are simultaneously displayed on the character selection screen 74 at the same size, the provisionally selected frame image 749 may be moved by operating the selection button 213, the right selection button 214, or the like.

  The “return one” selection image 746 is for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) (see FIG. 24). The selection image 747 of “return to top menu” is for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (see FIG. 24). The “end” selection image 748 is for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A) (see FIG. 24).

<Step S2201>
Returning to the description of FIG. 23, in step S2201 in the game setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A). Specifically, the MPU 51 is set to ON when the value of the variable display counter updated in the counter updating process of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. Step S2407 in the top menu screen processing, step S2511 in the game setting screen processing in FIG. 28 described below, or the fluctuation stop screen display set to ON in the fluctuation stop screen transition processing in step S2612 in the character selection screen processing in FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 based on whether or not the flag is on.

  When the display screen is the fluctuation stop screen 71 (Step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2202, and when the display screen is not the fluctuation stop screen 92 (Step S2201: No), shifts the processing to Step S2203. I do.

<Step S2202>
In step S2202, the MPU 51 executes a game start standby process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game start standby process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2203>
In step S2203, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen in step S2304 of the game start standby process in FIG. 26 described below, the step S2509 in the game setting screen process in FIG. 28 described below, or the step S2611 in the character selection screen process in FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the top menu screen 72 based on whether or not the top menu screen display flag that is set to on in the transition processing is on. When the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2204, and when the display screen is not the top menu screen 72 (step S2203: No), shifts the processing to step S2205.

<Step S2204>
In step S2204, the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen process, and ends the game setting process. The top menu screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2205>
In step S2205, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the game setting screen 94 (see FIG. 25C). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets a game setting screen display flag to be set to ON in a step S2409 of a top menu screen processing in FIG. 27 described below or a game setting screen transition processing in a step S2609 of a character selection screen processing in FIG. 29 described later. It is determined whether or not the display screen is the game setting screen 73 based on whether or not is turned on. When the display screen is the game setting screen 73 (Step S2205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2206, and when the display screen is not the game setting screen 73 (Step S2205: No), shifts the processing to Step S2207. I do.

<Step S2206>
In step S2206, the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the game setting screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2207>
In step S2207, the MPU 51 determines whether the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (see FIG. 25D). Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the display screen based on whether or not the character selection screen display flag set to on in the character selection screen transition processing of step S2507 of the game setting processing of FIG. It is determined whether or not the screen is a character selection screen 74. When the display screen is the character selection screen 74 (Step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S2208, and when the display screen is not the character selection screen 74 (Step S2207: No), shifts the processing to Step S2209. I do.

<Step S2208>
In step S2208, the MPU 51 executes a character selection screen process, and ends the game setting process. The details of the character selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2209>
In step S2209, when the display screen is not any of the fluctuation stop screen 71, the top menu screen 72, the game setting screen 73, and the character selection screen 74, the MPU 51 executes another process corresponding to the current display screen, and The setting process ends.

[Game start waiting process]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game start standby process executed in step S2202 of the game setting process of FIG. In the game start standby process, a process of shifting the display screen from the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25 (A)) to the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) in accordance with the player's operation on the operation button 20 is performed. Be executed.

<Step S2301>
In step S2301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the fluctuation of the main symbol has started based on whether the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. The MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started when the value of the fluctuation display counter is not 0.

  When the MPU 51 determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2301: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the game start standby process and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2301: No). ) And the process moves to step S2302.

<Step S2302>
In step S2302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the operation button 20 based on the first to third operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22A). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has been operated (step S2302: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2303, and if the MPU 51 determines that the operation button 20 has not been operated (step S2302: No), the game starts. The standby processing ends.

<Step S2303>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds to 60 seconds) has elapsed since the shift to the fluctuation stop screen 71. For example, when the fluctuation stop screen 71 is displayed (when the counter value of the fluctuation display counter becomes 0), the MPU 51 starts counting by the clock counter, and stops fluctuation by referring to the counter value of the clock counter. The time from when the screen 71 was displayed can be grasped.

  If the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed (step S2303: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2304, and if the MPU 51 determines that the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S2303: No), the game start standby process To end.

<Step S2304>
In step S2304, since the MPU 51 can determine that the operation button 20 has been operated after a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (Yes in steps S2302 and S2303), the MPU 51 responds to the operation on the operation button 20 by the player. Then, the display screen is shifted from the fluctuation stop screen 71 to the top menu screen 72. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to ON.

[Top menu screen processing]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the top menu screen process executed in step S2204 of the game setting process of FIG. In the top menu screen processing, a screen corresponding to an item selected by the player's operation on the selection determining unit 21 from a plurality of selection images 721 to 725 displayed on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B), for example, a game Processing for shifting the display screen to the setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) is executed.

<Step S2401>
In step S2401, the MPU 51 determines whether the main symbol 715 has started to change in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether the value of the variable display counter is 0. When determining that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2402, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2401: No). The process moves to step S2403.

<Step S2402>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2401: Yes), the top menu screen display flag is set to off (step S2402), and the top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S2403>
In step S2403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 22 (B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 22 (C)) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2404, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: NO). Shifts to step S2405.

<Step S2404>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a temporary selection display change process for changing the temporary selection display on the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) (step S2404). ). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated in a state where the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” shown in FIG. 25B is provisionally selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 726 one level higher than the selection image 723. Is moved to the side of the selected image 722. At this time, the selected image 723 is changed from the temporarily selected display indicating that the temporarily selected image is temporarily selected to the normal display, while the selected image 722 is changed from the normal display to the temporarily selected display. On the other hand, when the lower selection button 212 is operated in a state where the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” is provisionally selected, the MPU 51 moves the cursor image 726 to the side of the selection image 724 immediately below the selection image 723. By moving the selected image 723 from the temporary selection display to the normal display, the selection image 724 is changed from the normal display to the temporary selection display. When the processing in step S2404 ends, the MPU 51 ends the top menu screen processing.

  It should be noted that even when the left selection button 213 or the right selection button 214 is operated when the display screen is the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B), the MPU 51 temporarily selects the cursor image 726 and the selection images 721 to 725. It does not execute processing such as moving the display.

<Step S2405>
In step S2405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the enter button 21B. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the decision button 21B has been operated by the player based on the first to third decision operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22 (F)).

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the determination button 21B (step S2405: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2406, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2405: No), The top menu screen processing ends.

<Step S2406>
In step S2406, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 725 (see FIG. 25B) on the top menu screen 72 has been selected by the player operating the enter button 21B. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “finished” selected image 725 has been selected (step S2406: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2407 and determines that the “finished” selected image 725 has not been selected (step S2406). (S2406: No), the process moves to step S2408.

<Step S2407>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selected image 725 has been selected (step S2406: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B) to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (see FIG. 25A). ) Is executed (step S2407). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off, sets the variable stop screen display flag to on, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2408>
In step S2408, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 723 (see FIG. 25B) of “game setting customization” on the top menu screen 72 has been selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “game setting customization”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” has been selected (step S2408: Yes), the processing shifts to step S2409, and determines that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” has not been selected. If so (step S2408: No), the process moves to step S2410.

<Step S2409>
When determining that the selection image 723 of “game setting customization” is selected (step S2408: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25 (B)) to the game setting screen 73 (FIG. 25 (C)). A game setting screen transition process for transitioning to ()) is executed (step S2409). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to on while setting the top menu screen display flag to off, and ends the top menu screen processing.

<Step S2410>
In step S2410, the MPU 51 shifts to a display screen corresponding to the item selected by the player when the item selected by the player's operation on the determination button 21B is other than “end” and “game setting customization”. . At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to off.

[Game setting screen processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the game setting screen process executed in step S2206 of the game setting process of FIG. In the game setting screen processing, as shown in FIG. 24, in response to an operation performed by the player on the selection determining section 21, the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) is changed to a character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25D). (See FIG. 25B) and the top menu screen 72 (see FIG. 25B).

<Step S2501>
In step S2501 in FIG. 28, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When determining that the change of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2501: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2502, and determines that the change of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2501: No). The process moves to step S2503.

<Step S2502>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 is started (Step S2501: Yes), the game setting screen display flag is set to off (Step S2502), and the game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S2503>
In step S2503, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. More specifically, the MPU 51 determines whether the upper selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 22 (B)) and the first to third lower selection operation pattern flag (see FIG. 22 (C)) are higher. It is determined whether the selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212 has been operated by the player.

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2503: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2504, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2503: NO). Shifts to step S2505.

<Step S2504>
In step S2504, the MPU 51 determines whether the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211 and the lower selection button 212, similarly to the temporary selection display change processing in step S2404 in the top menu screen processing of FIG. In response to this, a temporary selection display change process of moving the cursor image 726 and the temporary selection display upward or downward on the game setting screen 94 is executed. When the processing in step S2504 ends, the MPU 51 ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2505>
In step S2505, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has performed an operation on the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). If the MPU 51 determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has been performed (step S2505: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2506, and determines that the operation on the determination button 21B has not been performed (step S2505: No). The game setting screen processing ends.

<Step S2506>
In step S2506, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 733 (see FIG. 25C) of the “character selection” on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “character selection”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “character selection” selection image 733 has been selected (step S2506: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2507 and determines that the “character selection” selection image 733 has not been selected. (Step S2506: No), the process proceeds to step S2508.

<Step S2507>
When determining that the selection image 733 of “character selection” has been selected (step S2506: Yes), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the character selection screen 74 (FIG. 25D )), A character selection screen transfer process is executed (step S2507). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off while setting the setting item selection screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2508>
In step S2508, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 734 of “return to one” on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “return to one” selected image 734 has been selected (step S2508: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2509, and the “return to one” selected image 734 has not been selected. Is determined (step S2508: No), the process proceeds to step S2510.

<Step S2509>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return to one” selection image 734 has been selected (step S2508: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the top menu screen 72 (FIG. 25C). A top menu screen shift process for shifting to (B)) is executed (step S2509). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen display flag to on while setting the game setting screen display flag to off, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2510>
In step S2510, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the “end” selection image 735 on the game setting screen 73 is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “end”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “finished” selected image 735 has been selected (step S2510: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2511, and determines that the “finished” selected image 735 has not been selected (step S2510). (S2510: No), the process moves to step S2512.

<Step S2511>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “end” selected image 735 has been selected (step S2510: YES), the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the game setting screen 73 (see FIG. 25C) to the fluctuation stop screen 71 (FIG. 25A). (See step S2511). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off, sets the fluctuation stop screen display flag to on, and ends the game setting screen processing.

<Step S2512>
In step S2512, if the item selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player is other than “character selection”, “return one”, and “end”, the MPU 51 corresponds to the item selected by the player. Move to the display screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off.

[Character selection process]
Here, FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the character selection process executed in step S2208 of the game setting process of FIG. In the character selection process, a process of determining a selected character (a selected character to be displayed as a selected character image 714 (see FIG. 25A)) selected by a player's operation on the selection determining unit 21 from a plurality of characters is executed. Then, a process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the fluctuation stop screen 71 or the top menu screen 72 is executed according to the item selected by the player.

<Step S2601>
In step S2601, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started in the symbol display unit 341 based on whether or not the counter value of the fluctuation display counter is 0. When determining that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2602, and determines that the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has not started (step S2601: No). The process moves to step S2603.

<Step S2602>
When the fluctuation of the main symbol 715 has started (Step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the game setting screen display flag to off (Step S2602), and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2603>
In step S2603, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the selection button 21A. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes first to third upper selection operation pattern flags, first to third lower selection operation pattern flags, first to third left selection operation pattern flags, and first to third right selection operation patterns. Based on the flags (see FIGS. 22B to 22E), it is determined whether the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, or the right selection button 214 has been operated by the player. .

  If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2604, and determines that an operation has not been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: NO). Shifts to step S2605.

<Step S2604>
If it is determined that an operation has been performed on the selection button 21A (step S2603: Yes), the MPU 51 determines that the operated selection button 21A is one of the upper selection button 211, the lower selection button 212, the left selection button 213, and the right selection button 214. A temporary selection display change process of moving the temporary selection display is executed according to which one of them is selected (step S2604). For example, when the upper selection button 211 is operated while the character selection image 741 is temporarily selected, the selection image 748 of “END” is changed to the temporary selection display. When the lower selection button 212 is operated, the selection image 746 of “return one” is changed to a temporary selection display. When the left selection button 213 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled one by one to the right and the selection image 743 of the character 9 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. Conversely, when the right selection button 214 is operated, the character selection images 741 to 745 are scrolled one by one to the left and the selection image 742 of the character 2 is moved to the center to change the temporary selection display. I do. When the processing in step S2604 ends, the MPU 51 ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2605>
In step S2605, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the player has operated the determination button 21B based on the first to third determination operation pattern flags (see FIG. 22F). If the MPU 51 determines that an operation has been performed on the determination button 21B (step S2605: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2606, and if the MPU 51 determines that an operation has not been performed on the determination button 21B (step S2605: No), The character selection screen processing ends.

<Step S2606>
In step S2606, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 has been selected by the operation on the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the character selection image 741 has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated. If MPU 51 determines that character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the process proceeds to step S2607, and if MPU 51 determines that character selection image 741 has not been selected (step S2606: No), the process proceeds. Is shifted to step S2608.

<Step S2607>
If it is determined that the character selection image 741 has been selected (step S2606: Yes), the MPU 51 selects a character corresponding to the character selection image 741 provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated, as shown in FIG. 25 (A) is executed to determine a selected character to be displayed (step S2607), and the character selection screen process ends.

  Specifically, the MPU 51 updates information on the selected character stored in the RAM 512. For example, when the selected character is character 2 is stored in the RAM 512, and when the character 1 is determined as the selected character in step S2607, the information indicating that the selected character is the character 1 is stored in the RAM 512. Rewrite the content.

  In this embodiment, the display screen is not shifted from the character selection screen 74 to another screen such as the top menu screen 72 even when the character determination processing is performed. The screen may be shifted from the selection screen 74 to another screen such as the top menu screen 72.

<Step S2608>
In step S2608, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 746 of "return one" is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item that has been provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return by one”. If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 746 has been selected (step S2608: Yes), the processing shifts to step S2609, and determines that the “return one” selection image 746 has not been selected. If so (step S2608: No), the process moves to step S2610.

<Step S2609>
If the MPU 51 determines that the “return one” selection image 746 has been selected (step S2608: YES), the MPU 51 executes a game setting screen transition process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the game setting screen 73 (step S2608). Step S2609). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off while setting the game setting screen display flag to on, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2610>
In step S2610, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the selection image 747 of "return to the top menu" is selected by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the item provisionally selected when the enter button 21B is operated is “return to the top menu”. When the MPU 51 determines that the selected image 747 of “Return to Top Menu” has been selected (Step S2610: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S2611, and determines that the selected image 747 of “Return to Top Menu” has not been selected. If so (step S2610: No), the process moves to step S2612.

<Step S2611>
If the MPU 51 determines that the selection image 747 of “Return to top menu” has been selected (step S2610: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a top menu screen shift process of shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the top menu screen 72 (step S2611). ). At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off, sets the top menu screen display flag to on, and ends the character selection screen processing.

<Step S2612>
The MPU 51 determines that “end” has been selected when the character selection image is not selected and the selected item is other than “return one” and “return to the top menu” by the operation of the determination button 21B by the player. Since the determination can be made, a variation stop screen transition process for shifting the display screen from the character selection screen 74 to the variation stop screen 71 is executed (step S2612), and the character selection screen process ends. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the character selection screen display flag to off and sets the fluctuation stop screen display flag to on.

[Command judgment processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S1909 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the command determination processing, a command received from main controller 4 is determined, and processing corresponding to the command is executed.

<Step S2701>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S2701, the MPU 51 determines whether a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (Step S2701: Yes), the processing moves to Step S2702. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (Step S2701: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination processing. The command received from the main controller 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have been received in step S2701, and is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area when the command has been processed. It is memorized.

<Step S2702>
In step S2702, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a fluctuation pattern command. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2702: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2703. If the command is not a variation pattern command (step S2702: NO), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2706.

<Step S2703>
In step S2703, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (main symbol combination, variation type and effect type) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the change pattern command, the first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 31A), the change type table (see FIG. 31B), and the effect type table (see FIG. 31B) stored in the ROM 511 in advance. The variation pattern is determined based on the counter values of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512 (see FIGS. 32A to 32C). Further, when the fluctuation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot, sets the 5R certain jackpot flag to ON when the jackpot type is 5R certain variable jackpot, Is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot flag is set to ON.

  The stop symbol combination of the main symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a main symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a main symbol that is secondly stopped and displayed, and the last stopped symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design that The effect type table includes a normal reach effect table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 32A), a super reach effect table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 32B), and a special reach effect table corresponding to special reach (see FIG. 32B). FIG. 32 (C)).

  FIG. 31A is a diagram showing an example of the first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 31A, in the first stop symbol selection table, a main symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display section 341 is determined. In FIG. 31A, a symbol combination indicating that the main symbol is “1” to “9” and “333” is a probable jackpot (either 5R probable jackpot or 16R probable jackpot), “777” Is a symbol combination that indicates that it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, and that the symbol combination other than “333” and “777” is a symbol combination that indicates either a 5R regular jackpot, a 5R variable jackpot, or a 16R variable jackpot. It is assumed.

  When the lottery result of the jackpot lottery by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 is “5R normal jackpot”, there is no distribution of “3” and “7” as the first stop symbol, and the main symbols other than “3” and “7” The first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is “5R regular jackpot”, the symbol combination of “333” or “777” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot or the 16R probability change jackpot (probability change jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

  Also, when the lottery result is "5R probable big hit", "7" is not assigned as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols other than "7". That is, when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change hit is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is “5R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “333” indicating the 5R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. In other words, even when the lottery result is “5R probable big hit”, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination of “333” whose main symbol stop display result indicates the 5R normal big hit can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is “5R probable jackpot” and the main symbol other than “3” other than “7” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the first promotion effect flag to ON. . The first promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect that clearly indicates a 5R certain-variable jackpot in a state suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot (visual obstruction in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in effect determination processing).

  Further, when the lottery result is “16R probable jackpot”, there is a distribution to all the main symbols “1” to “9”, and the first stop is performed at a predetermined probability from the main symbols “1” to “9”. The symbol is determined. In other words, even when the lottery result is “16R probability change jackpot”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of “777” indicating the 16R probability change jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even if the lottery result is "16R probability big hit", the symbol combination stop display other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating the main symbol stop display result indicating the 5R probability big hit or 5R normal big hit is stopped and displayed. Can be done. When the lottery result is “16R probable big hit” and “3” is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 sets the second promotion effect flag to ON, and sets “3” as the first stop symbol. If a main symbol other than "7" is determined, the MPU 51 sets the third promotion effect flag to ON. The second promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates the 16R probability change jackpot with the suggestion of the 5R probability change jackpot (visual obstruction in FIG. 36). Step S2901 in effect determination processing). The third promotion effect flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute a probable change promotion effect that clearly indicates a 16R certain-variable jackpot in a state suggesting that it is a 5R normal big-hit (see FIG. Step S2901 in effect determination processing).

  Then, when determining the first stop symbol when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. Thereby, the stop symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated line of the symbol display unit 341 for the variable game is determined.

  On the other hand, when the lottery result is "out", there is a distribution to all the main symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined with a predetermined probability from the main symbols "1" to "9". Is done. Then, when the lottery result is “missing” and the first stop symbol is determined, the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol selected based on the missing type table (see FIG. 8D) and the first determined symbol. The second stop symbol is determined based on the stop symbol. For example, in a case where the out-of-off type is out-of-reach reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be a symbol before and after the first stop symbol. In addition, when the disengagement type is reach other than disengagement, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the first stop symbol and the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. The pattern is determined. When the type of separation is completely off, the second stop symbol is determined to be different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined irrespective of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the main symbol may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the sound lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

  FIG. 31B is a diagram illustrating an example of a fluctuation type table. As shown in FIG. 31B, in the variation type table, the variation display time and the content of the variation type corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the fluctuation pattern command “A01” in which the lottery result is “normal jackpot” and the fluctuation pattern is “01” is associated with the fluctuation display time “30 s” and the fluctuation type “normal reach”. In addition, a fluctuation display time “60 s” and a fluctuation type “Super Reach” are associated with the fluctuation pattern command “B02” in which the lottery result is “5R probable big hit” and the fluctuation pattern is “02”. A fluctuation pattern command “C03” having a result of “16R probability change jackpot” and a fluctuation pattern of “03” is associated with a fluctuation display time “90s” and a fluctuation type “special reach”. Further, the fluctuation pattern command “D04” in which the lottery result is “out” and the fluctuation pattern is “04” is associated with the fluctuation display time “7s” and the fluctuation type “no reach”, and the lottery result is A fluctuation pattern command “D05” that is “out” and whose fluctuation pattern is “05” is associated with a fluctuation display time “10 s” and a fluctuation type “no reach”.

  Further, FIGS. 32A to 32C are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect type table. The effect type table is defined for each change type. FIG. 32 (A) is a normal reach effect table when the change type is normal reach, FIG. 32 (B) is a super reach effect table when the change type is super reach, and FIG. 32 (C) is It is a special reach effect table when the variation type is special reach. Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example where the effect types corresponding to each of the variation types are five, but the effect types may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 32, the effect type table when the change type is no reach is omitted.

  In the normal reach effect table shown in FIG. 32 (A), “effect X1” is an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result (5R regular jackpot, 5R probability variable jackpot, 16R probability variable jackpot, and miss). ~ "Direction X5" is defined. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is normal reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the normal reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  In the super reach effect table shown in FIG. 32 (B), “effect Y1” to “effect Y5” are determined as the effect types corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. If the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is super reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the super reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Further, in the special reach effect table shown in FIG. 32C, "effect Z1" to "effect Z5" are determined as effect types corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter in accordance with the lottery result. When the MPU 51 determines that the variation type is special reach, the MPU 51 selects an effect type corresponding to the counter value of the effect type counter from the special reach effect table according to the lottery result.

  Then, the MPU 51 sets a change pattern command, a change type table, an effect type table, and a display change pattern command indicating the stop symbol combination of the main symbol determined by the effect type counter, the change type, and the effect type in the RAM 512. This display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in step S2705 described later. On the other hand, the display control device 6 that has received the display variation pattern command executes the symbol variation display and the effect display using the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command. The display variation pattern command may include information on the presence or absence of a big hit.

<Step S2704>
Returning to the description of FIG. 30, in step S2704, the MPU 51 sets the variable display time corresponding to the variable pattern command in the variable display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. The variable display counter is decremented by 1 in the counter updating process of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the symbol variable display is being performed based on the variable display counter. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the time. For example, when the count value of the variable display counter becomes 0, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variable display has ended.

<Step S2705>
In step S2705, the MPU 51 outputs to the display control device 6 a display variation pattern command for specifying the content of the stop symbol combination, the variation type, and the effect type of the main symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and ends the command determination process. Let it. The display change pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination, change type, and effect type of the main symbol determined in step S2703. On the other hand, in the ROM 611 of the display control device 6, a fluctuation image of a main symbol corresponding to each display fluctuation pattern command, an effect image and the like are stored. Accordingly, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the combination of the stop symbol of the main symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

  Specifically, in the symbol display section 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes the variable display of a plurality of main symbols (three in this embodiment) until a preset variable display time elapses. Then, the fluctuation of the plurality of main symbols is stopped and displayed in order. When all the main symbols are stopped and the jackpot lottery results are displayed, a process corresponding to the symbol change display of the next variable game or the jackpot game is executed. Here, during the fluctuation display of the main symbol, an effect corresponding to the content of the fluctuation type and the effect type specified by the display fluctuation pattern command is executed.

<Step S2706>
In step S2706, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a jackpot game start command. The big hit game start command is a command indicating that a big hit game is started, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is set to ON at the start of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game start command (step S2706: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2707, and if the received command is not a jackpot game start command (step S2706: NO), the process Is shifted to step S2709.

<Step S2707>
When the jackpot game start command is received (Step S2706: Yes), the MPU 51 executes a jackpot game effect determination process (Step S2707). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process of determining an effect executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the gaming state has shifted to the jackpot game state. The details of the jackpot game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2708>
In step S2708, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to ON when the jackpot game effect determination process ends, and ends the command determination process. The big hit game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in step S3202 of the big hit game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2709>
In step S2709, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the round game is to be started and in what round the round game is a round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game. Is set in step S1813 of the opening / closing execution mode control process. Here, if the received command is a round game start command (step S2709: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2710, and if the received command is not a round game start command (step S2709: No), the processing Shifts to step S2711.

<Step S2710>
In step S2710, the MPU 51 sets a round game effect start flag to ON. At this time, the MPU 51 specifies the number of rounds of the round game to be started from the information on the number of rounds of the round game included in the round game start command, stores the number of rounds in the RAM 512, and ends the command determination process. I do. The round game effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to execute the round game effect process in step S3209 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. In addition, the number of rounds of the round game stored in the RAM 512 in step S2710 is referred to in a case where it is determined in step S3016 in error processing in FIG. 42 described later whether or not there is an uncompleted round game.

<Step S2711>
In step S2711, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a variable winning opening winning command. The variable winning opening winning command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that a gaming ball has won the variable winning opening 316. When a gaming ball wins the variable winning opening 316, a prize ball command setting process ( This is set in step S1303) of FIG. Here, if the received command is a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: YES), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2712, and if the received command is not a variable winning opening winning command (step S2711: NO). Then, the process shifts to step S2713.

<Step S2712>
In step S2712, the MPU 51 executes a payout counting process. In this payout counting process, the cumulative payout number of winnings for the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot series is counted and stored. Specifically, the MPU 51 counts a value obtained by adding the number of prize balls (for example, 13) for winning in the variable winning opening 316 each time the variable winning opening winning command is received, and stores the counted value in the RAM 512 as the cumulative number of stored balls. Remember. Note that the accumulated payout number stored in the RAM 512 is cleared after the end of the jackpot. The payout counting process may be a process of counting the cumulative value of the winning numbers of the game balls to the variable winning opening 316 without directly counting the cumulative payout number, and storing the accumulated value in the RAM 512. Further, the payout counting process may be a process of counting a so-called difference ball number obtained by subtracting the number of hit game balls (the number of outgoing balls) at the time of the jackpot game from the cumulative number of payouts at the time of the jackpot. The difference ball number may be not only the number of launch game balls at the time of the jackpot game, but also a game ball obtained by further subtracting the number of launch game balls in the probable variable time saving mode which shifts after the jackpot game. The payout counting process counts not only the cumulative payout number with respect to the number of winning balls in the variable winning opening 316 but also the cumulative payout number obtained by adding the number of winning balls from other winning openings such as the general winning opening 313. It may be processing.

  Here, during the jackpot casino, for example, in the normal non-time-saving game state (a state where the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode), the lottery result of the jackpot lottery for the variable game becomes a big hit, that is, from a so-called first hit, a gaming state. Usually includes all jackpots before falling to the non-time saving game state, and the initial hit is also included in the jackpot series. The jackpot casino can also be defined as all jackpots until the gaming state falls to the normal time reduction gaming state.

  In the payout counting process of step S2712, the cumulative payout number may be counted as a sum of the payouts for winning in the general winning port 313, the first operating port 314, and the second operating port 315. In this case, the cumulative number of balls may be calculated by counting only the balls being played in the jackpot game, or may be counted in addition to the jackpot game, in addition to the balls played in the probable change game state and the normal time reduction game state.

<Step S2713>
In step S2713, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an ending start command. The ending start command is a command for notifying the sound lamp control device 5 that the ending is started, that is, the end of the opening / closing execution mode. When the ending is started, in the step S1718 of the big hit game control process of FIG. Is set. Here, when the received command is the ending start command (step S2713: Yes), the processing proceeds to step S2714, and when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2713: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2713. The process moves to S2715.

<Step S2714>
In step S2714, the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The ending start flag is referred to when determining whether to execute the ending effect start process in step S3212 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2715>
In step S2715, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The big hit game end command is a command for ending the big hit game, and is set when the big hit game execution flag is turned off at the end of the big hit game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, if the received command is a jackpot game end command (step S2715: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2716, and if the received command is not a jackpot game end command (step S2715: No), the process proceeds. Is transferred to step S2717.

<Step S2716>
In step S2716, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to ON, and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when it is determined whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in step S3315 of the jackpot game effect in the jackpot game effect process of FIG.

<Step S2717>
In step S2717, MPU 51 determines whether the received command is a hold command. The suspension command includes the first suspension command and the second suspension command as described above. The first hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or out of order, the change pattern, and the number N of change display reservations generated by winning the first operating port 314. The second hold command includes information for specifying the jackpot type or out of order, the change pattern, and the number of hold M of the change display generated by winning the second operation port 315. Here, if the received command is a hold command (Step S2717: Yes), the processing proceeds to Step S2718, and if the received command is not a hold command (Step S2717: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S2719. Transition.

<Step S2718>
In step S2718, when the received hold command is the first hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or out, the change pattern, the number of hold N, and the like specified by the first hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. . Similarly, when the received hold command is the second hold command, the MPU 51 stores the jackpot type or the outlier, the change pattern, the number of holds M, and the like specified by the second hold command in the change type area of the RAM 512. After executing step S2718, the MPU 51 ends the command determination processing.

<Step S2719>
In step S2719, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error occurrence command. The error occurrence command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that an error has occurred. When an error occurs, the error determination command in FIG. 9 is used as an error occurrence command corresponding to the type of error (step S1007). ). If the received command is an error-occurring command (step S2719: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2720. If the received command is not an error-occurring command (step S2719: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to step S2720. The process moves to S2721.

<Step S2720>
In step S2720, the MPU 51 sets the error occurrence flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The error occurrence flag is referred to when determining whether or not to display an error in step S3001 in error processing in FIG. 41 described later.

<Step S2721>
In step S2721, the MPU 51 determines whether the received command is an error elimination command. The error elimination command is a command for notifying the audio lamp control device 5 that the error has been eliminated. When the error is eliminated, the error determination command shown in FIG. 9 is used as an error elimination command corresponding to the type of error (step S1007). ). Here, if the received command is an error elimination command (Step S2721: Yes), the processing proceeds to Step S2722. If the received command is not an error elimination command (Step S2721: No), the MPU 51 proceeds to Step S2721. The procedure moves to S2723.

<Step S2722>
In step S2722, the MPU 51 sets the error resolution flag to ON, and ends the command determination processing. The error elimination flag is referred to when determining whether or not to cancel the error display in step S3007 in the error processing in FIG. 41 described below.

<Step S2723>
In step S2723, the MPU 51 executes a process based on another command received from the main control device 4, and then ends the command determination process.

[Big hit game production decision processing]
Here, FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination processing executed in step S2707 of the command determination processing in FIG. In the jackpot game effect determination processing, the effects executed in the jackpot game, such as the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the ending effect, which are executed in the jackpot game, are determined.

<Step S2801>
In step S2801, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a so-called holding series is executed after the end of the jackpot game. The hold consecutive villa is a jackpot (5R) as hit information in any of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB when the jackpot game ends and the game state shifts to the time saving mode. This is executed when information indicating that there is a probable jackpot, a 16R probable jackpot or a 5R regular jackpot is included. In other words, the holding series means that a jackpot game occurs in a variable game having the upper limit of the number of holdings M at the end of the jackpot game. For example, when the number of holds M at the end of the jackpot game is four, and when a jackpot occurs in the variable game within four times after the shift to the time saving mode, it is referred to as a hold series. Whether or not the suspension series is executed can be determined, for example, by referring to the fluctuation type area of the RAM 512 and determining whether or not the jackpot type specified by the second suspension command is stored.

  However, in step S2801, at the stage of starting the opening effect, it is determined whether or not the holding extended villa is executed by referring to the variation type area. That is, if the lottery result in the jackpot lottery from the start of the jackpot game effect to the end of the opening / closing execution mode effect is a jackpot, it will not be a determination target of the held series in step S2801. In addition, with respect to the starting winning of the game ball to the first operating port 314 or the second operating port 315 from the start of the jackpot game production to the end of the opening / closing execution mode production, for example, by executing the holding extended villa finalizing production in the ending. In this case, whether or not the holding villa is to be executed is determined by the holding villa that indicates that the holding villa is to be performed in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. It is determined whether or not a fixed effect is to be performed.

<Step S2802>
When the holding extended villa is executed (Step S2801: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the holding extended villa flag to ON (Step S2802). The reserved extended-village flag is referred to in step S2907 of the visual recognition inhibition production determination process in FIG. 36 to be described later when determining whether or not to execute the reserved extended-village confirmation effect as the visual inhibition effect.

<Step S2803>
In step S2803, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining an opening effect to be executed in the opening from the transition to the jackpot game to the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect according to the symbol combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed, based on the opening effect table stored in the ROM 511, for example. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information of the determined opening effect type to the display control device 6 as an opening effect command. Here, as the opening effect, the MPU 51 specifies that the symbol combination is “777”, and that the symbol combination is “16R”, and that the symbol combination is “333”, that the symbol combination is “R”. In the case where the suggested effect and the symbol combination are the zoro eyes other than "777" and "333", the effect indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is determined. That is, the opening effect is determined according to the symbol combination of the main symbols stopped and displayed, not the jackpot type.

  Further, in the opening effect, a specific image such as an image indicating the number of consecutive games at the jackpot may be displayed. Here, the number of jackpot casinos is as described in step S2712 described above, and is, for example, the number of jackpots from the initial hit until the game state falls to the normal non-time saving game state. On the other hand, the specific image displayed in the opening effect includes, for example, an image of a character including the selected character.

<Step S2804>
In step S2804, the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character. The MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type based on the type of the jackpot flag (5R normal jackpot flag, 5R probability variable jackpot flag, and 16R probability variable jackpot flag) set to ON in step S2703 of the command determination process of FIG. On the other hand, by referring to the RMA 512, the MPU 51 specifies, for example, any one of the characters 1 to 9 as the selected character.

<Steps S2805 and S2806>
In step S2805, the MPU 51 determines the open / close execution mode effect determination table according to the jackpot type and the selected character specified in step S2804, and further determines the open / close execution mode effect based on the open / close execution mode effect determination table. The process is executed (Step S2806).

  Here, FIG. 34 shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R, and FIG. 35 shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R.

  The 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table illustrated in FIG. 34 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the open / close execution mode effect at the time of the 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect at the time of the 5R jackpot using the same 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table without distinction between the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R certain-variable jackpot. Of course, different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect may be determined based on these tables.

  The 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character. In the present embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes nine effect scenario tables corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9. Including. In FIG. 34, each effect scenario table is represented as “5R character N effect scenario table” (N is an integer of 1 to 9). Each effect scenario table includes an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter.

  The effect scenario type specifies a combination of round game effects executed in the 1R to 5R round games. In the present embodiment, five effect scenarios are set for each of the selected characters, and a character effect with the selected character as the main character (hereinafter, referred to as “specific character effect”) is executed for each scenario. Here, as the character production in the round game, for example, reproduction of a promotion video (PV) of the character, display of an introduction moving image or a still image of the character, and the like can be considered.

  The number of effect scenarios for the selected character is not limited to five, and may be another number, and it is not necessary to set the same number of scenarios for each of the selected characters. In each scenario, a character effect is executed in all round games, but a character effect is executed in some round games and a round game effect other than the character effect is executed in another round game. Good.

  The round game effect character type specifies a round game effect executed in each of the round games 1R to 5R. In FIG. 34, a character effect mainly composed of a character N (N is an integer of 1 to 9) is represented as “character N” (N is an integer of 1 to 9). A specific character effect is defined for each scenario, and it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in the same round (specific unit game) regardless of which scenario is selected. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in 1R of each scenario. That is, in the 5R jackpot game, a specific character effect on the selected character is always executed in the first round game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect for the selected character from being missed by paying attention to the variable winning opening 316, for example. Note that the specific character effect does not necessarily need to be executed in the 1R, but may be in a round after the 2R.

  The scenario type counter is a counter for selecting an effect scenario, and an effect scenario is associated with each count value in a predetermined range of the scenario type counter. For example, in the production scenario table for 5R character 1, the counter value of the scenario type counter is "0 to 39" in "Character 1 scenario A", the counter value is "40 to 79" in "Character 1 scenario B", and the counter value is A value of “80 to 119” is in “Character 1 scenario C”, a counter value of “120 to 159” is in “Character 1 scenario D”, and a counter value of “160 to 199” is in “Character 1 scenario E”. Are associated. The scenario type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 199, and is incremented by 1 in the counter update process of step S1907 in the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. 19, and the MPU 51 determines the open / close execution mode effect. It is possible to determine an effect scenario based on the count value of the scenario type counter that is sometimes acquired. For example, when the selected character is “Character 1” and the counter value of the scenario type counter is “88”, “Character 1 Scenario C” is determined as the effect scenario.

  The 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table illustrated in FIG. 35 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the 16R big hit open / close execution mode effect. The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to a selected character including an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter, similarly to the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table. The effect scenario type, the round game effect character type, and the scenario type counter have already been described in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and a description thereof will be omitted. In the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, it is determined that the specific character effect is executed in the same round regardless of which scenario is selected.

  In this embodiment, the number of scenarios in each of the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables is larger than that of the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and 12 scenarios are set. Of course, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table may have the same number of scenarios in each scenario table as the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, or may be smaller than the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table. Good. Further, the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table is not limited to the effect of executing an effect having a different character type for each round game. May be used.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment, the specific character effect for the selected character is determined while being fixed to one round of the round game (specific round). However, when the game situation is advantageous for the player, For example, in the case where the reservation consecutive villa is fixed, when the next big hit is scheduled to be relatively executed, such as in the case of a probability change big hit, in a gaming situation advantageous to such a player. In a certain jackpot game, a specific character effect may not be executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the big hit game by paying attention to whether the specific character effect is executed in one round of the round game. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because of the advantageous gaming situation for the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character effect may be executed in all round games in the opening and closing execution mode, or a specific character effect in at least one of the opening and ending in addition to all round games in the opening and closing execution mode. It may be executed. Thereby, when the specific character effect is not executed in the previous big hit, the player can enjoy the specific character effect in the current big hit game up to the last big hit game. In addition, regarding executing a specific character effect in all round games in the opening and closing execution mode, when it is a probability change jackpot, as in the case where a reserved consecutive mansion is confirmed, it is a condition that is an advantageous game situation for the player. Is also good.

<Step S2807>
Returning to the description of FIG. 33, in step S2807, the MPU 51 executes a process of determining an ending effect to be performed in the ending from the end of the open / close execution mode to the end of the big hit game. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines an ending effect according to the jackpot type based on, for example, an ending effect table stored in the ROM 511. Further, the MPU 51 transmits information on the determined ending effect type to the display control device 6 as an ending effect command.

  Here, the ending effect is to inform the player that the big hit game is finished after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. In the ending effect, for example, information such as a lottery result of a jackpot lottery in a variable game that has triggered the execution of the jackpot game (clearly indicating a game state to be shifted after the end of the jackpot game) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. You. Specifically, in the ending effect, the lottery result is in a normal time-saving game state (a state in which the low-probability mode is in the high-frequency support mode) or a normal non-time-saving game state (in a low-probability mode and the state is not in the high-frequency support mode). If the so-called first hit, which is a big hit, is a 5R certain-change big hit or a 16R certain-change big hit, an image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 which clearly indicates that the game mode shifts to the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, that is, the short-time short game mode. When the first hit is the 5R normal big hit, an image that clearly indicates that the game mode shifts to the normal non-time saving game state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. An image that clearly indicates that the game state shifts to the probable change time saving game state is, for example, “XXRUSH rush”. On the other hand, the image that clearly indicates the transition to the normal non-time-saving gaming state is, for example, “entering a chance zone” or the like, and the number of time savings is also displayed. Further, in the ending effect in a case where the lottery result is a big hit in the probabilistic short time gaming state, an image that clearly indicates that the game mode shifts to the probabilistic short time gaming state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 again. An image that clearly indicates that the game mode is to shift to the probable change time saving game state again is, for example, “continue XXRUSH”. In addition, the ending effect is an image showing the number of transitions to a certain-variable time-saving gaming state (for example, the number of RUSH continuations) with respect to one initial hit, and an image of a character appearing in a big hit effect in a variable game leading to a big hit game. The information may be displayed on the display unit 341. The image indicating the number of times of shifting to the certainty-saving time saving game state or the image of the character is determined in step S2807.

  Further, in the ending effect, an image relating to payouts such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game and the total number of payouts in the extended villa is displayed on the symbol display section 341. In addition, the ending effect may be one that displays a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that a holding series to be described later is to be executed. These images are determined, for example, in the ending effect start process of step S3214 in the jackpot game effect process described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S2808>
In step S2808, the MPU 51 executes a visual display inhibition effect determination process for obstructing the visual recognition of the image game effect executed on the symbol display unit 341, and ends the jackpot game effect process. The details of the visual recognition inhibition effect determination processing will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  In the jackpot game effect deciding process shown in FIG. 33, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, the ending effect, and the visual obstruction effect are determined in this order, but the order of determining each effect is limited to the order shown in FIG. Not done. For example, the ending effect may be determined before the opening / closing execution mode effect, or the visual recognition inhibition effect may be determined before at least one of the opening / closing execution mode effect and the ending effect. In addition, the opening / closing execution mode effect or the visual impediment effect is not limited to when the big hit game start command is received (at the start of the big hit game), but may be determined at the start of the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the visual recognition inhibition effect is determined before the opening / closing execution mode effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect is determined so that the specific character effect for the selected character is executed in the round game in which the visual inhibition effect is not executed. This point will be described later as a ninth embodiment with reference to FIGS.

[Visibility inhibition effect determination processing]
Here, FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the visual impairment effect determination process executed in step S2808 of the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. In the visual impairment effect determination process, it is determined whether or not to execute the visual impairment effect, and when executing the visual impairment effect, the timing for executing the visual impairment effect is determined.

  Here, the visual obstruction effect is an effect that hinders the visual recognition of the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341. The visual effect obstructs a part of the game image effect, and a part of the game image effect is visible. Including effects in which all or almost all of the effects and game image effects are obstructed, and the game image effects are completely or almost invisible. In addition, the visual obstruction effect is not limited to an effect performed in the symbol display unit 341 such as a layer image effect in which an image is displayed on a layer that can be visually recognized on the display screen of the symbol display unit 341. A front display image effect executed on the front display having a light-transmitting property arranged so as to cover the symbol display unit 341 on the front surface, and a movable position in which the movable accessory member 39 moves to a position covering the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 Includes character actuation effects. Further, the layer image effect is, for example, an effect in which the layer image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so as to be superimposed on the game image effect, whereby part or all of the game image is visually recognized. And an effect in which a layer image is displayed on the entire display screen of the symbol display unit 341 instead of the game image effect. In addition, the layer image displayed superimposed on the game image effect is not only a non-transparent layer image in which the image of the lower layer is not visible, but also a lower layer image that is visible, for example, faintly or vaguely. Includes a transparent layer image that allows you to see the layer image.

  In the following, before describing the visual impairment effect determination processing shown in FIG. 36, the opening / closing execution mode effect and the visual impairment effect will be described first with reference to FIGS. 37 to 40.

  FIG. 37 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33, and an example of a round game for executing a visual impediment effect. In FIG. 37 (A), the opening / closing execution mode effect is an example in which “Character 1 scenario A” is determined as the effect scenario in the 16R certain-variable big hit game in which the selected character is the character 1. The opening / closing execution mode effect of “Character 1 Scenario A” with a 16R jackpot is a round game effect, in which a character effect mainly composed of character 1, character 2, character 14, character 7,. Is done. Here, the specific character effect on the selected character is fixedly executed in one round (first unit game) as described later (see FIGS. 34 and 35). In the example of FIG. 37A, the selected character is character 1, and a specific character effect on this character 1 is executed in one round.

  In the example of FIG. 37 (A), as a visual impediment effect, a display effect for displaying a specific number of balls is performed in two rounds, a reserved extended play effect is performed in three rounds, and a promotion effect is performed in four rounds. Then, for the round in which the specific number of heads display effect is executed, the specific number of heads display flag stored in the RAM 512 is set to ON, and for the round in which the specific number of heads display effect is not executed, the specific number of heads display flag Is set to off. In the example of FIG. 37 (A), the specific number payout display flag is set on for two rounds in which the specific number payout display effect is executed, and the specific number payout display flag is set off in other rounds. (See steps S2915 and S2916 in FIG. 36).

  In the gaming machine 10, while it is determined that the specific character effect on the selected character is executed in one round as described above (see steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33, and FIGS. 34 and 35). It is determined that each of the held consecutive-village confirmation effect and the promotion effect, which are the visual obstruction effects, are to be executed after the second round (steps S2906 and S2911 in FIG. 36).

  In the gaming machine 10, the jackpot game effects (opening effect, opening / closing execution mode effect, ending effect, and visual recognition inhibiting effect) determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 are used in the jackpot game effect process of FIG. Be executed.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, in a round game in a jackpot game, there is a machine that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in an effect in a variable game. is there. In addition, in jackpot games, promotion promotions that suggest or indicate promotion from regular jackpots to probable change jackpots, and hold-consolidation consoles that clearly indicate that you have won the jackpot that will be a reserved jackpot after the jackpot game, etc. Some gaming machines do.

  However, the promotion effect and the reserved extended residence effect are generally executed while obstructing the visual recognition of the effect on the character. For example, the movable character member operates so as to cover the symbol display portion, and an overlay image notifying that the result of the promotion effect and the reservation extended villa is confirmed is displayed on the symbol display portion, so that the character display portion is displayed. The visual recognition of the effect is hindered. For this reason, the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character may be hindered by the movable role or the overlay image at the timing when the effect of the player's favorite character is being executed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the effect of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the specific character effect on the selected character is executed at a timing different from the visual recognition inhibition effect that hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect. That is, in the gaming machine 10, in each of the jackpot games, a specific character effect is fixedly executed to a specific round game among a plurality of round games, and a visual impediment effect is executed in a round game different from the specific round. I do. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, a visual recognition inhibition effect that hinders visual recognition of a character effect such as a promotion effect or a reserved consecutive-village effect is one round (specific round) that is a specific character effect execution round for the selected character. Executed after the second round that was avoided. Therefore, the player can sufficiently enjoy the selected character in the specific character production in the jackpot game without the visual recognition of the specific character production for the selected character being hindered by the visual restriction production.

  FIG. 37 (B) is a diagram illustrating an example of the round game effect screen 81. As shown in FIG. 37 (B), the round game effect screen 81 has a round number display image 811, a jackpot round number display image 812, and a character introduction image 813.

  The round number display image 811 is an image for displaying the number of rounds being executed. The round number display image 811 shown in FIG. 37B indicates that the number of rounds being executed is four.

  The jackpot round number display image 812 is an image indicating the maximum number of round games executed in the jackpot game. In the jackpot round number display image 812 shown in FIG. 37 (B), it is suggested that the maximum number of round games executed in the jackpot game is 5 rounds, that is, the jackpot type is 5R ordinary jackpot or 5R certain variable jackpot. I have.

  The character introduction image 813 is a still image displayed in the character effect, and displays the characteristics of the character displayed in the variable game effect. In the character introduction image 813 shown in FIG. 37B, the characteristics of the character 7 are displayed together with the image of the character 7. Although FIG. 37B illustrates an example in which the introduction image of the selected character is displayed as a still image as the specific character effect for the selected character, the specific character effect may be a moving image of the selected character. Alternatively, a combination of a moving image and a still image may be used. Further, the specific character effect is not limited to displaying an image for introducing the selected character, but is not particularly limited as long as the image is mainly composed of the selected character in addition to a moving image such as a promotion video.

  FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of a promotion effect executed as a visual impediment effect in a jackpot game effect. The promotion effect has a successful promotion effect shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to 38 (C) and a failed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 38 (A), 38 (E) and 38 (F). In the opening / closing execution mode effect shown in FIG. 37 (A), the promotion effect is executed in four rounds of the round game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the promotion effect, in both the promotion success effect and the promotion failure effect, first, the screen shifts from the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 37 (B)) to the button operation request screen 82. The button operation request screen 82 is a screen in which an operation button image 821 imitating the operation button 20 is superimposed and displayed as an overlay image on the round game effect screen 81, and is a screen for urging a player to perform an operation on the operation button 20. . In the button operation request screen 82, the visualization of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect is disturbed by the operation button image 821, and the effect of displaying the operation button image 821 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the successful promotion effect, the round game in which the display of the operation button image 821 is released is provided on condition that the operation button 20 is operated by the player while the operation button image 821 is displayed. The screen shifts to the effect screen 81, and at the same time, a movable auditors operation effect in which the movable auditors member 39 moves from the standby position to the operating position is executed. In a state where the movable auditors member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round gaming effect screen 81 is covered by the movable auditors member 39, and the visual recognition of the round gaming effect screen 81 is hindered. That is, the movable role actuation effect in the successful promotion effect is performed in such a manner that the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect is hindered. In the promotion effect, when the operation button 20 is not operated while the operation button image 821 is displayed, the movable role operation effect may be executed immediately after the display of the operation button image 821 is released, or As an effect, a movable role actuation effect may be executed immediately after the end of the round game or at the end of the round game, or the promotion effect in the jackpot game may be forgotten.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (C) and FIG. 38 (D), in the promotion success production, after the execution of the movable role actuation effect, the movable role member 39 returns from the operation position to the standby position, and the display screen is rounded. The game transitions from the game effect screen 81 to the successful promotion effect screen 83, and returns to the round game effect screen 81 after a certain period of time. The promotion success rendering screen 83 shown in FIG. 38 (C) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion success rendering has been executed, and includes a character image 831 that clearly indicates the promotion success of “congratulations to promotion!”. The character image 831 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 over the entire round game effect screen 81, and completely hinders the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. For this reason, the effect of displaying the character image 831 as a successful promotion effect corresponds to the visual obstruction effect of the present invention.

  On the round game effect display screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (D), the round number display image indicates that the jackpot type is 5R, and the jackpot round number display image clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 16R. 812. That is, in this embodiment, as the jackpot round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81, an image indicating that the jackpot type is 5R is displayed before the execution of the promotion success effect, and after the execution of the promotion success effect. Displays an image indicating that the jackpot type is 16R.

  In the present embodiment, the promotion success promotion has been described as explicitly indicating that the promotion is a 5R regular jackpot or a 5R probability change jackpot to a 16R jackpot. May be executed. Also, the promotion success effect may be executed as an effect of displaying a promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates the success of the promotion, for example, an image shown in FIG. Conversely, the promotion success effect may be an effect of executing a movable character actuation effect without displaying a promotion confirmation image clearly indicating the promotion success. Also, as shown in FIG. 38 (C), the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transmissive image in which the lower layer image cannot be confirmed at all on the round game effect screen 81. The lower layer image may be displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed faintly or faintly in any case of covering part or all of the round game effect screen 81. You may. Furthermore, the promotion effect is an effect in which the movable role actuation effect is executed without shifting to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20. Good. In addition, in the promotion successful production, the movable accessory member 39 may be configured to include a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and a promotion confirmation image that clearly indicates that the jackpot type is 16R may be displayed on this display. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 38 (E) and FIG. 38 (F), in the promotion failure production, the display screen shifts from the round game production screen 81 to the promotion failure production screen 84, and a certain time (for example, 1 second to 5 seconds) is changed. After the elapse, the screen returns to the round game effect screen 81. The promotion failure production screen 84 shown in FIG. 38 (E) is a screen that clearly indicates that the promotion failure production has been performed, and includes a character image 841 that clearly shows the promotion failure with “Zannin”. The character image 841 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 over the entire round game effect screen 81, and hinders the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 841 corresponds to the visual inhibition effect of the present invention.

  Note that the promotion failure effect may be executed as an effect in which the movable auditors member 39 does not operate without displaying the character image 841 indicating the promotion failure. Further, the promotion confirmed image can be changed in the same manner as the promotion confirmed image. In other words, the promotion confirmed image does not need to be displayed as a non-transparent image in which the lower layer image cannot be confirmed at all on the round game effect screen 81 as shown in FIG. It may be displayed so as to cover the part, or in any case where part or all of the round game effect screen 81 is covered, the lower layer image is displayed as a transparent image that can be confirmed faintly or vaguely. You may.

  In addition, on the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 38 (F), a big hit round number display image 812 that clearly indicates that the big hit type is 5R is displayed. That is, in the present embodiment, the big hit round number display image 812 of the round game effect screen 81 does not change before and after the execution of the promotion failure effect.

  FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (C) are diagrams illustrating an example of a reserved extended-village confirmation effect that is executed as a visually impaired effect in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 39 (A), in the held consecutive villa fixed effect, first, on the round game effect screen 81, a movable auditors operation effect in which the movable auditors member 39 moves from the standby position to the operating position is executed. In a state where the movable auditors member 39 has moved to the operating position, the round gaming effect screen 81 is covered by the movable auditors member 39, and the visual recognition of the round gaming effect screen 81 is hindered. In other words, the movable auditorium actuation effect in the reservation extended villa finalization effect is performed as an effect in which the visual recognition of the character introduction image displayed as the character effect is hindered.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (B), in the holding extended villa finalizing effect, after the movable auditors operation effect is performed, the movable auditors member 39 returns from the operating position to the standby position, and the display screen is the round game effect screen 81. Then, the screen shifts to the hold extended residence display screen 85, and returns to the round game effect display screen 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 5 seconds). The reservation extended villa confirmation display screen 85 shown in FIG. 39 (B) is a screen that clearly indicates that the reservation extended villa is to be executed, and clearly indicates that the reservation extended villa with “confirmation of the reserved extended villa” is to be executed. A character image 851 is included. This character image 851 is displayed as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81 over the entire round game effect screen 81, and hinders the visual recognition of a character introduction image displayed as a character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 851 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention.

  In addition, the holding extended villa finalizing effect is a holding extended villa finalizing image that clearly indicates that the holding extended villa is to be executed without executing the movable auditorium operation effect, for example, the holding extended villa finalizing image shown in FIG. 39 (B). May be executed. In addition, even if the hold consecutive villa finalization effect shifts to the button operation request screen 82 that displays the operation button image 821 that prompts the player to operate the operation button 20, the movable character operation effect is executed. Good. Further, in the reserved extended-village determination effect, the movable accessory member 39 may be configured to include a display such as a liquid crystal display device, and the reserved extended-village finalized image may be displayed.

  FIGS. 40 (A) to 40 (C) are diagrams illustrating an example of a specific number of payouts display effect that is executed as a visual impediment effect in a jackpot game effect. As shown in FIG. 40 (A) to FIG. 40 (C), in the specific number payout display effect, the display screen shifts from the round game effect display screen 81 to the specific number payout display image display screen 86, and is displayed for a predetermined time (for example, After a lapse of 1 second to 5 seconds), the display screen returns to the round game effect screen 81 from the specific number payout display image display screen 86. The specific number payout display image display screen 86 includes an image that informs the player that the number of payouts has reached the specific number.

  Here, the display of the specific number of payouts is, for example, a display of the cumulative payout number obtained by adding the number of prize balls to the variable winning opening 316 in a series of jackpots from the initial hit (a series of jackpots). The so-called difference obtained by subtracting the number of launched game balls at the time of a jackpot (the number of outgoing balls) from the number of balls (or not only the number of launched game balls at the time of the jackpot game, but also the number of launched game balls in the probable variable time saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game). Executed as a display for the number of balls or a display for the cumulative number of balls to which the number of prize balls from the other prize ports such as the general prize port 313 is added in addition to the cumulative number of balls for the variable prize port 316 as well as the number of prize balls. Is done.

  The specific number payout display image display screen 86 in FIG. 40B includes a character image 861 of “3000 shots OVER” that notifies that the number of payouts has reached 3,000. The character image 861 is superimposed and displayed on the entire round game effect screen 81 as an overlay image of the round game effect screen 81, and obstructs visual recognition of a character introduction image displayed as a character effect. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character image 861 corresponds to the visual impairment effect of the present invention. In addition, the specific number payout display image display screen 86 does not necessarily need to be an overlay image of the round game effect display screen 81. That is, on the specific number payout display image display screen 86, the character image 861 may be displayed without executing the round game effect in the lower layer.

  Here, the specific number is set to, for example, a positive integer multiple of the minimum specific number. The minimum specific number is set to, for example, 1000. Of course, the specific number is not limited to 1000, but may be another numerical value such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S2901 and S2902>
Returning to the description of FIG. 36, in step S2901, the MPU 51 determines whether any of the first to third promotion effect flags set to on in step S2703 in the command determination process in FIG. It is determined whether or not to execute the promotion effect as the round game effect in the execution mode. When any of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the promotion effect flag set to ON to OFF (step S2902), and executes the process. It moves to step S2906. On the other hand, when all of the first to third promotion effect flags have been set to off (step S2901: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2903.

<Step S2903>
In step S2903, the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot type is 5R jackpot. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether it is a 5R jackpot in which the promotion effect can be executed or a 16R jackpot in which the promotion effect is not executed. Here, if the jackpot type is 5R jackpot (step S2903: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2904, and if the jackpot type is not 5R jackpot (step S2903: No), that is, if it is 16R jackpot, The process moves to step S2907.

<Step S2904 and Step S2905>
When the jackpot type is not the 5R jackpot (Step S2903: No), the MPU 51 performs a lottery to execute the promotion failure effect (Step S2904), and determines whether the result is to execute the promotion failure effect. (Step S2905). That is, in the present embodiment, when the lottery is won in the 5R jackpot, the promotion failure effect is executed. Of course, without performing the lottery, the promotion failure effect may always be executed when the promotion effect flag is set to off on condition that the jackpot type is 5R jackpot.

<Step S2906>
In step S2906, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game for executing the promotion effect to the second round or later. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the number of rounds of the round game in which the successful promotion effect is executed on condition that one of the first to third promotion effect flags is set to ON (step S2901: Yes). Set after the round. On the other hand, on condition that all of the first to third promotion effect flags are set to OFF (step S2901: No), the MPU 51 wins the lottery for executing the promotion failure effect (step S2905: Yes), the number of rounds of the round game in which the promotion failure effect is executed is set to the second round or later. For example, the MPU 51 determines a round in which the promotion effect is to be executed based on a lottery table for determining the promotion effect after the second round (for example, a lottery table having no winning value for executing the promotion effect in one round). I do. In the example shown in FIG. 37A, it is set that the promotion effect is executed in four rounds.

  According to this step S2906, when executing a promotion effect that is a visual impediment effect, it is determined that the promotion effect is to be executed after the second round that avoids one round (specific round) that is a specific character effect execution round for the selected character. Then, the promotion effect determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3404 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later.

<Steps S2907 and S2908>
In step S2907, the MPU 51 determines whether the hold extended villa flag that is set to on in step S2802 in the jackpot effect determination process of FIG. 33 is set to on, that is, the held extended villa finalization effect as a round game effect in the open / close execution mode. It is determined whether or not to execute. When the reservation extended-village flag is set to ON (step S2907: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the reserved extended-village flag to OFF (step S2908), and shifts the processing to step S2909. On the other hand, the MPU 51 terminates the visual recognition impediment effect determination process when the hold extended flag is set to off (step S2906: No).

<Steps S2909 and S2910>
In step S2909, the MPU 51 temporarily sets the number of rounds of the round game in which the reserved extended-village confirmation effect is executed to the second and subsequent rounds on condition that the reserved consecutive-village flag is set to ON (step S2907: Yes). Then, it is determined whether or not the round in which the provisionally set reserving extended residence effect is executed matches the round in which the promotion effect is executed (step S2910). For example, the MPU 51 determines, based on a lottery table (for example, a lottery table that does not have a winning value for executing the reserved extended-village-determined effect in one round) for determining the reserved extended-village-determined effect after the second round. Determine the round to execute the Zhuang decision production.

  Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2909 when the execution round of the provisionally set reserving villa fixed effect matches the execution round of the promotion effect (step S2910: Yes). That is, until the MPU 51 determines that the temporarily set execution round of the held extended villa finalizing effect does not match the execution round of the promoted production (step S2910: No), the temporary round of the execution of the held extended homestead finalization effect of step S2909 is performed. The setting and the determination as to whether or not the temporarily set execution round of the held extended-village fixed effect in step S2910 matches the execution round of the promoted effect are repeatedly performed. On the other hand, when the temporarily set execution round of the held extended residence confirmation effect does not match the execution round of the promoted effect (step S2910: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2911.

<Step S2911>
In step S2911, the MPU 51 sets the execution round of the held extended villa finalizing effect temporarily set after the second round in step S2909 as the round for executing the held extended villa finalizing effect. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is set that the held extended villa finalization effect is executed in three rounds.

  According to these steps S2909 to S2911, when executing the hold consecutive villa finalization effect which is the visual obstruction effect, the hold sequence is executed after the second round which avoids one round (specific round) which is a specific character effect execution round for the selected character. It is determined to execute the villa determination effect, and the held consecutive villa determination effect determined to avoid the specific round is executed in step S3406 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later. In addition, by step S2910, it is possible to avoid that the execution round of the held extended villa fixed effect is not only the execution round of the specific character effect but also the execution round of the promotion effect. On the other hand, the promotion (success) production and the holding extended residence confirmation production, which are the visual obstruction production, are the productions that clearly indicate to the player that the game situation is advantageous to the player, and therefore the promotion (success) production and the reservation extended residence are performed. Not only is a visual impediment effect such as a fixed effect performed in a round game different from the specific character effect for the selected character, but also such visual impediment effects are prevented from being performed simultaneously or in the same round game. For this reason, the player is provided with an opportunity to execute the visual recognition inhibition effect, which clearly indicates that the player is in an advantageous game situation, a plurality of times, while sufficiently enjoying the selected character by the specific character effect on the selected character. This allows the player to fully enjoy not only the specific character effect but also the visual impediment effect in the jackpot game.

<Step S2912>
In step S2912, the MPU 51 calculates the estimated number of payouts in the jackpot game with respect to the cumulative payout storage number stored in the RAM 512 in the payout count processing executed in step S2712 of the command determination processing in FIG. By adding up, the number of accumulated balls at the end of the jackpot game is estimated. The estimated number of payouts is the number of wins (counts) at which the variable winning opening 316 is closed before the maximum opening time (for example, 30 seconds) of the variable winning opening 316 elapses with respect to the number of rounds according to the jackpot type. And the value obtained by multiplying the number of payout game balls (the number of prize balls) for winning in the variable winning opening 316. For example, when the number of counts at the 5R jackpot is 9, and the number of prize balls for the variable winning opening 316 is 13, the estimated number of payouts is 5R × 9C × 13 = 585.

  As described above, the specific number payout display is, for example, a display for the cumulative payout number obtained by adding the number of prize balls for winning in the variable winning opening 316 in a series of jackpots (representative hits) from the initial hit. A so-called difference ball obtained by subtracting the number of launched game balls (the number of outgoing balls) (or the number of launched game balls in the jackpot game, as well as the number of launched game balls in the probable variable time saving mode that shifts after the jackpot game) from the accumulated number of balls. This is executed as a display for the number, or as a display for the accumulated payout number obtained by adding not only the accumulated payout number to the winning number of balls in the variable winning opening 316 but also the number of winning balls from another winning opening such as the general winning opening 313. It is possible.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the round game effect of the jackpot game is fixed to one round of the specific character effect for the selected character and determined first (steps S2804 to S2806 in FIG. 33), and thereafter, the accumulated number of balls is specified. By estimating the round game in which the number transition occurs, the execution round of the specific number of displayed balls display effect as the visual obstruction effect is determined after the second round after the execution of the specific character effect execution round (steps S2913 to S2916 described later). .

  However, the number of launched game balls (the number of out-balls) and the number of prize balls from other winning ports tend to vary, and it is difficult to estimate them in advance. ) And the number of prize balls from other winning openings, it is difficult to accurately estimate a round game in which the number of payouts becomes a specific number or more. Therefore, in this step S2912, it is not necessary to consider the number of launched game balls (the number of out-balls) or the number of prize balls from other prize ports as the cumulative number of prize balls. Is estimated as the number of balls to be added. In the present embodiment, the specific number of payout display effects is executed based on the cumulative payout number obtained by adding the number of winning balls to winning in the variable winning opening 316.

<Step S2913>
In step S2913, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the estimated accumulated number of balls to be ejected in step S2912 exceeds the unreached specific number among a plurality of predetermined specific numbers. For example, if the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of the minimum specific number of 1000 and the cumulative payout number stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the big hit game is 1794, the cumulative payout number at the end of the big hit game Is 2379 (1794 + 585), the MPU 51 determines that the estimated cumulative number of payouts exceeds the specific number in the current jackpot game. On the other hand, for example, if the cumulative payout number stored in the RAM 512 at the start of the big hit game at 5R big hit is 1170, the estimated payout number is 1755 (1170 + 5R × 9C × 13). In such a case, the MPU 51 determines that the estimated accumulated payout number does not exceed the specific number.

  Here, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2914 when the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number (step S2913: Yes), and when the estimated cumulative number of balls does not exceed the specific number (step S2913: No). Then, the visual recognition inhibition effect determination processing ends.

<Step S2914>
When the estimated number of accumulated balls to be played exceeds the specified number (Step S2913: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game exceeding the specified number is one round (Step S2914). For example, in the estimation example of step S2912, since the cumulative number of payouts becomes 2002 (1794 + 208) in the winning of 16 game balls (16C × 13 = 208) with respect to the variable winning opening 316, two rounds are performed. It can be estimated that 7C exceeds the specific number of 2000. In such a case, the MPU 51 estimates that the number of rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of payouts exceeds the specific number (specific number payout display display round) is two.

  In the case of a 5R jackpot, a round game in which the accumulated number of balls exceeds a specific number (a specific number of display rounds) is usually performed once when the specific number is set to a positive integer multiple of 1000. is there. On the other hand, in the case of a 16R jackpot, the estimated number of balls in the jackpot game may exceed 1000 pieces (for example, 16R × 9C × 13 = 1872 pieces). More round games (specific number payout display rounds) can be two rounds. For example, when the cumulative number of stored balls is 1794, in addition to the above two rounds, the estimated number of balls at the end of the round is 3081 (1794 + 117 (= 1R for the number of balls = 9C × 13). The eleven rounds of ()) × 11) are also estimated as rounds in which the estimated cumulative number of balls to be thrown exceeds a specific number.

  Here, if the round game in which the estimated accumulated number of balls exceeds the specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S2915, and executes the round in which the estimated accumulated number of balls exceeds the specific number. If the game is not one round (step S2914: No), the visual recognition inhibition effect determination processing ends.

<Step S2915>
When the round game in which the estimated accumulated number of balls exceeds the specific number is one round (step S2914: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the two-round specific number ball display flag to ON (step S2915), and the visual recognition is inhibited. The effect determination processing ends. The specific number payout display flag is a flag indicating whether the game is a round game in which the specific number payout display is executed, and the specific number payout display is executed in the round game set to ON. That is, when the specific number payout display flag for two rounds is set to ON in step S2915, the specific number payout display is executed in two rounds. The specific number payout display flag is referred to in step S3301 in the payout display processing of FIG. 45 described later.

<Step S2916>
If the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number is not one round (step S2914: No), the MPU 51 turns on the specific number of rounds display flag corresponding to the round game in which the estimated cumulative number of balls exceeds the specific number. (Step S2916), and the visual recognition inhibition effect determination processing ends.

[Error processing]
FIGS. 41 and 42 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the error processing executed in step S1910 of the sub timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the error processing, when an error has occurred, a process of displaying an error on the symbol display unit 341 is performed. For example, when an error occurs during execution of the opening / closing execution mode effect in the jackpot game, the display screen changes from the round game effect screen 81 illustrated in FIG. 43 (A) to the error illustrated in FIG. 43 (B). The screen shifts to an image display screen 87 (priority display image screen). The error occurrence image display screen 87 informs that an error has occurred and informs the type of the error. In the example of FIG. 43B, it indicates that a magnet detection error has occurred. An error occurrence image 871 (priority display image) is displayed. Further, the error occurrence image display screen 87 is a screen in which an error display image is superimposed as an overlay image of a screen such as the round game effect screen 81, for example. The visual recognition of the character effect is hindered. When the screen shifts to the error occurrence image display screen 87, an error display may be performed without displaying a specific character effect as a lower layer of the error display. On the other hand, when the error is resolved, the display screen is changed from the error occurrence image display screen 87 shown in FIG. 43 (B) to the round game effect screen 81 shown in FIG. 43 (A). The display returns to the display screen corresponding to the game state after the error is released.

  Furthermore, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when an error display during a jackpot game hinders recognition of a specific character effect on a selected character, for example, an error display is performed during execution of a specific character effect, If the specific character effect is executed as a lower layer of the error display during the execution of the display, if the execution of the specific character effect is stopped due to the execution of the error display, the specific character effect is canceled after the error display is released. Enables the performance of the production.

  By the way, as a conventional gaming machine, there is a conventional gaming machine that performs an effect on a character in a round game in a jackpot game as described above. In general, when an error occurs in a gaming machine, it is notified that an error has occurred in, for example, a speaker or a symbol display unit. On the other hand, errors include normal errors that do not need to be reported immediately after an error such as a ball clogging error as described above, and fraud detection that needs to be reported immediately after an error such as a magnet detection error has occurred. There is an error.

  However, the error notification is also performed in the jackpot game, and for example, an error image indicating that an error has occurred is displayed on the symbol display unit. Therefore, in a jackpot game, for example, by performing an error display for a fraud detection error that needs to be immediately notified after an error occurs, the execution timing of the effect on the player's favorite character and the display timing of the error image are changed. May overlap. In this case, the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character is hindered by the fraud detection error display. Further, sensors for detecting fraud, such as the magnet sensor 35, the radio wave sensor 36, and the vibration detection sensor, may operate due to erroneous detection even when fraud is not actually performed. Therefore, even in a situation where the game is being played appropriately, the fraud detection error display hinders the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character. Furthermore, the display timing of the priority display image that notifies information that needs to be displayed in priority to the character effect, not limited to the fraud detection error display, overlaps with the character effect execution timing, so that the effect of the favorite character is effected. May be obstructed. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the effect of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while displaying the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether it is the execution timing of the specific character effect. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10, it is possible to grasp whether the visual recognition of the specific character effect has been hindered by the priority display image. This makes it possible to compensate for a case where visual recognition of a specific character effect is hindered by the priority display image. For example, when the display of the priority display image is terminated by eliminating an error when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is disturbed by the priority display image, the disturbed specific character effect is executed after the display of the priority display image is completed. And so on. Thereby, even when the priority display image such as the error occurrence image 871 inhibits the visual recognition of the specific character effect, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character effect in the big hit game.

  Hereinafter, a case will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 and 42 where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect. However, compensation for the case where the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect, etc. The technical idea of the present invention is not limited to the error occurrence image 871, but can be widely applied to a case where the display timing of a priority display image that displays information that needs to be displayed with priority over the character production overlaps with the execution timing of the character production. .

<Step S3001>
Returning to the description of FIG. 41, in step S3001, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the error occurrence flag set in step S2720 in the command determination process in FIG. 30 is set to on. When the error occurrence flag is set to ON (step S3001: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3002, and when the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 executes the processing. The process moves to S3007.

<Step S3002 to Step S3004>
In step S3002, the MPU 51 executes an error display process of superimposing and displaying an error display image as an overlay image on the display screen at the time of occurrence of an error, further sets an error display flag to ON (step S3003), and The flag is set to off (step S3004). The error display flag indicates whether an error is being displayed, and is referred to in step S3008 of the error processing.

<Step S3005>
In step S3005, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is one round of the opening and closing execution mode, that is, whether or not the specific character effect is being executed as the round game effect of the opening and closing execution mode in the jackpot game. The determination as to whether or not the round is the open / close execution mode can be made, for example, based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2712 in the command determination process of FIG. . If it is the first round of the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, if the specific character effect is being executed when an error occurs, the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3006. On the other hand, if the opening / closing execution mode is not one round (step S3005: NO), that is, if the specific character effect is not executed when an error occurs, the MPU 51 ends the error processing.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 51 sets the specific character effect carryover execution flag when the round is the opening / closing execution mode (step S3005: Yes), that is, when the error is displayed at a timing where the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered. Set to ON. The specific character production carryover execution flag indicates that the visual recognition of the specific character production has been hindered by an error display. Based on this specific character production carryover execution flag, the MPU 51 determines that the specific character production carryover is error-displayed. In the case of being inhibited, after canceling the error display, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the specific character effect.

  In the present embodiment, regardless of the type of error, an error is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when an error occurs, and when the error display is performed at a timing where visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, the specific character is displayed. Directed carryover execution is set to on. However, when an error display is performed at a timing where the visual recognition of a specific character effect is hindered, when an error that requires urgency to notify a fraud detection error or the like occurs, the error display is performed, while a normal error is displayed. When an error that does not require urgency, such as the occurrence of an error, may not be performed immediately after the error occurs. In this case, if an error that does not require urgency such as a normal error has been resolved at the stage when the specific character effect has been completed, it is not necessary to display the error again. If an error that does not require urgency, such as a normal error, has not been resolved at the stage when the specific character effect has ended, an error display may be started after the specific character effect has ended. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a minor error that does not require urgency from hindering the visual recognition of the specific character effect.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, if the error occurrence flag is set to off (step S3001: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the error elimination flag set to on in step S2722 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. Determine whether or not. If the error elimination flag is set to ON (step S3007: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3010 in FIG. 42, and if the error elimination flag is set to OFF (step S3007: NO), The process moves to step S3008.

<Step S3008>
In step S3008, when both the error occurrence flag and the error elimination flag are set to OFF (No in both steps S3001 and S3007), the MPU 51 sets the error display flag indicating whether an error is being displayed to ON. It is determined whether or not there is. When the error display flag is set to ON (step S3008: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3009, and when the error display flag is set to OFF (step S3008: NO), the error processing is performed. To end.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON. If the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON (step S3009: Yes), the error processing is performed. To end. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to off (step S3009: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3005. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether the execution of the specific character effect has been started during the error display. Thus, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the execution of the specific character effect being started during the error display (during the occurrence of the error), the MPU 51 continues to operate after the error display is canceled. It is possible to perform the effect.

<Steps S3010 to S3012>
If the error elimination flag is set to ON (step S3007: YES), in step S3010 shown in FIG. 42, the MPU 51 cancels the error display, and further sets the error display flag to OFF (step S3011). The error resolution flag is set to off (step S3012).

<Step S3013>
In step S3013, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific character effect carryover execution flag set to on in step S3006 in FIG. 41 is set to on. When the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON (step S3013: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to S3014. On the other hand, when the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to OFF (S3013: No), the MPU 51 ends the error processing without executing the specific character effect.

<Steps S3014 and S3015>
In step S3014, the MPU 51 sets the specific character effect carryover execution flag to off, and determines whether the round game effect execution flag set to on in step S3402 in the round game effect process of FIG. 46 described later is on. It is determined whether or not it is (step S3015). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether or not a round game effect is being executed. Based on the round game effect execution flag, it can be determined whether or not the mode is the open / close execution mode.

  Here, when the round game effect execution flag is set to on (step S3015: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3016, and when the round game effect execution flag is set to off (step S3015). : No), the error processing ends. That is, even when the specific character effect carryover execution flag is set to ON, the MPU 51 executes the ending effect although the jackpot game has not ended, in addition to the case where the jackpot game has ended. In this case, the error processing ends without executing the specific character effect.

<Step S3016>
In step S3016, the MPU 51 determines whether or not there is an uncompleted round game at the stage when the error has been cleared. The determination as to whether there is an uncompleted round game may be made based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game start effect flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. it can. The MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3017 when there is an undigested round game (step S3016: Yes), and shifts the processing to step S3018 when there is no undigested round game (step S3016: No). .

<Steps S3017 and S3018>
In step S3017, when there is an uncompleted round game (step S3016: Yes), the MPU 51 sets a specific character effect in the RAM 512 as a round game effect of a round game to be executed next (rewrite of round game effect) Is performed), and the error processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step S3018, when there is no uncompleted round game (step S3016: No), the MPU 51 can determine that the error is released in the final round game and that the specific character effect can be executed in the ending. In at least a part of the ending, the ending effect is reset so as to execute the specific character effect, and the error processing ends.

  As described above, in steps S3017 and S3018, it is determined that a specific character effect is to be executed when there is an uncompleted round game after the error is cleared or when the ending effect is not executed. For this reason, it is possible to execute a specific character effect within a time shorter than one round of digestion time + interval after the error is released, thereby enabling a specific character effect to be executed in a short time after the error is released. Become.

  Here, when resetting the ending effect so as to execute the specific character effect, the MPU 51 determines, as the specific character effect, any one of the same character effect as the specific character effect whose visual recognition is hindered by the error display and a different character effect. Execution may be determined. Also, when deciding to execute a character production different from the specific character production whose visual recognition has been hindered by the error display, the MPU 51 performs an ending production that is not performed in a character production that is normally performed in a variable game production or a jackpot game production. The execution of a special special character effect specialized or a special specific character effect having a lower selectivity than other specific character effects may be determined. As a special specific character effect, for example, it is conceivable to display an image for a selected character in a special costume or pose. As described above, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by performing a rare effect or a premiere effect on the specific character as compensation for the visual effect of the specific character effect being hindered, It is possible to reduce emotions such as frustration and dissatisfaction of the player by executing a special specific character effect.

  In the error processing shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when there is an uncompleted round game after the error is cleared, or when the ending effect is not executed, it is determined to execute the specific character effect. In addition to this condition, it may be determined whether a specific character effect is to be executed after the error is canceled by lottery. In this case, for example, the lottery may be performed before the execution of step S3016, or before setting the specific character effect carryover execution flag to on in step S3006, it is determined by lottery whether to set this flag to on. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to execute a specific character effect by lottery. When deciding whether or not to execute a specific character effect by lottery, there is a case where the specific character effect is executed and a case where the specific character effect is not executed even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error image 871. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the specific character effect after the display of the error occurrence image 871 is released, and to improve the interest in the big hit game.

  In the above-described error processing, when the error display period overlaps with the execution period of the specific character effect, that is, an error occurs during execution of one round as a round game, or execution of one round is started during occurrence of an error. In this case, the specific character effect is executed after the error is released. However, when the overlap period between the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, for example, the overlap period is the maximum execution period per round of the specific character effect (the maximum opening time of the variable winning opening 316 (for example, 30 seconds)). If it is 10% or less, it is considered that the player is enjoying a specific character effect for a considerable period of time. Therefore, when the overlap period between the error display period and the execution period of the specific character effect is short, the specific character effect may not be executed after the error is cleared.

  In the error processing of the present embodiment, while the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect. It can be grasped whether it was hindered. Accordingly, when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error occurrence image 871, the compensation can be performed. For example, in the present embodiment, when the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled by resolving the error when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is obstructed by the error occurrence image 871, the inhibited specific character effect is canceled. In the later undigested round game or ending, a visual obstruction effect is executed. Thereby, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the priority display image, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character effect in the big hit game.

  In the above, the case where the visual recognition of the specific character effect is obstructed by the error occurrence image 871 has been described. However, the priority display image that informs the information other than the error occurrence image 871 that needs to be displayed in preference to the character effect. The same effect can be obtained when the display timing of the character overlaps with the execution timing of the character effect.

[Big hit game production process]
Here, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the jackpot game rendering process executed in step S1912 of the sub timer interrupt process of FIG. In the jackpot game effect process, the opening effect, the ending effect, the opening / closing execution mode effect, and the like determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 are executed.

<Step S3201>
In step S3201, the MPU 51 executes a payout number display process of displaying on the symbol display unit 341 that the cumulative payout number is equal to or more than the specific number. Details of the payout number display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3202>
In step S3202, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag set to on in step S2708 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. If the jackpot game effect start flag is on ( Step S3202: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3203, and if the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the process proceeds to step S3207.

<Step S3203>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S3203: YES), the MPU 51 determines whether the jackpot that has caused the transition to the jackpot game state is a so-called initial hit (step S3203). Here, the initial hit is, for example, a big hit in a case where the lottery result in the big hit game lottery becomes a big hit in a normal non-time saving game state (a state in which the low probability mode is not the high frequency support mode). If the big hit is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3204. If the big hit is not the first hit (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
If the jackpot that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is the first hit (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the first specific number in the RAM 512 (step S3204). Here, the first specific number is the minimum specific number when the specific number payout display is performed, and is set to, for example, 1000. Of course, the first specific number (minimum specific number) is not limited to 1000, but may be another number such as 500 or 2000.

<Steps S3205 and S3206>
The MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag to OFF (step S3205), executes an opening effect start process (step S3206), and ends the jackpot game effect process. In the opening effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the speaker 26 and the illuminator 27 to execute the sound effect and the lamp effect as the opening effect determined in step S2803 in FIG. 33, and also causes the display control device 6 to perform the opening effect. A command for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute an image effect is transmitted.

<Step S3207>
If the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S3202: No), the MPU 51 determines whether the round game effect start flag set on in step S2710 of the command determination process in FIG. 30 is set on. If the round game effect start flag is on (step S3207: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3208, and if the round game effect start flag is off (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3212. Move to

<Step S3208>
In step S3208, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the round game is one round. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether to end the opening effect. The determination as to whether or not the round game is one round can be made, for example, based on the number of rounds stored in the RAM 512 when the round game effect start flag is set to ON in step S2710 in the command determination process of FIG. . When the round is one round (Step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to Step S3209, and when the round is not one round (Step S3208: No), shifts the processing to Step S3210.

<Step S3209>
When the round is one round (Step S3208: Yes), the MPU 51 executes an opening effect ending process (Step S3209). That is, the MPU 51 executes the opening effect ending process when the round game start flag is turned on during the execution of the opening effect.

<Steps S3210 and S3211>
In step S3210, the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to off, executes a round game effect (step S3211), and ends the jackpot game effect process. That is, the MPU 51 starts a round game effect corresponding to the round game among the opening / closing execution mode effects determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. Also, when it is determined in step S2808 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 that the MPU 51 executes at least one of the promotion effect that is the visual impediment effect and the held consecutive residence confirmation effect in the round game, The visual obstruction effect is executed. The details of the round game effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S3212>
In step S3212, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending start flag that is set to on in step S2714 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. If the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes) ), The process proceeds to step S3213, and if the ending start flag is off (step S3212: No), the process proceeds to step S3215.

<Steps S3213 and S3214>
When the ending start flag is on (step S3212: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the ending start flag to off (step S3213), executes the ending effect start process (step S3214), and ends the jackpot game effect process. I do. In the ending effect start process, the MPU 51 causes the effect means such as the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the symbol display unit 341 to start the ending effect determined in step S2807 of the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. If the ending effect has been reset in step S3018 in the error processing of FIG. 42, the ending effect reset by the error processing is executed instead of the ending effect determined by the jackpot game effect determination processing.

  In addition, the MPU 51 causes the symbol display unit 341 to display an image relating to a payout such as the number of payouts in the jackpot game or the total number of payouts in the extended game as an ending effect. In addition, the ending effect may be such as to display a confirmed image or the like that clearly indicates that the held extended villa is to be executed. These images are determined, for example, in step S3214. Also, the MPU 51, when executing the reserved extended-village confirmation effect in the ending performance separately from the reserved extended-village confirmed effect as the visual obstruction rendering effect, displays the reserved extended-village confirmed image on the symbol display unit 341 before the ending production starts. The determination of the held extended-village confirmation effect such as the display and the output of the reserved extended-village confirmation sound from the speaker 26 is determined.

<Step S3215>
In step S3215, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect ending flag set to on in step S2716 in the command determination process of FIG. 30 is set to on. If the jackpot game effect ending flag is on ( Step S3215: Yes), the process moves to step S3216, and if the big hit game effect end flag is off (step S3215: No), the big hit game effect process is ended.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
If the jackpot game effect ending flag is on (step S3215: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect ending flag to off (step S3216), and executes an ending effect ending process (step S3217). The rendering process ends.

[Ball display effect processing]
Here, FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the payout display effect processing executed in step S3201 of the big hit game effect processing of FIG. In the payout display effect processing, when the cumulative payout number due to winning in the variable winning opening 316 in the jackpot game exceeds a specific number, a specific number payout that notifies that the cumulative payout number exceeds the specific number. Perform a display effect. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is expected that a specific number of payouts is displayed in one round in which a specific character effect is performed on the selected character, a process of performing the specific number of payouts in two rounds is executed. I do.

  By the way, in the conventional gaming machine, as described above, an overlay image for notifying that the result of the promotion effect or that the reserved retreat has been confirmed is displayed on the symbol display unit, thereby hindering the visual recognition of the effect on the character. You. Here, as the overlay image, for example, a payout display image displayed on the symbol display unit every time a certain number of game balls are acquired in a jackpot game. Since this ball display image is displayed each time the number of acquired game balls exceeds a certain number, the ball display image is displayed at the timing when the effect of the player's favorite character is being executed. Thus, the visual recognition of the effect of the favorite character may be hindered. When such a situation occurs, the player cannot fully enjoy the effect of the favorite character.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when it is expected that the payout display is performed in one round in which the specific character effect is performed on the selected character, the payout display is performed in two rounds. The processing to be performed is performed. Therefore, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character image production in the big hit game without the visual recognition of the specific character production for the selected character being hindered by the display of the payout balls.

<Step S3301>
In step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number payout display flag set to on in step S2915 or S2916 of the visual impairment effect determination process of FIG. 36 is set to on for the round game. I do. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game corresponds to the round game for executing the specific number of payout display effects. Here, when the specific number payout display flag is set to ON for the round game (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3302, and turns off the specific number payout display flag. Is set (Yes at Step S3301), the process proceeds to Step S3306.

<Step S3302>
In step S3302, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the accumulated payout number counted in the payout counting processing in step S2712 in the command determination processing in FIG. 30 is equal to or more than a specific number. Here, the specific number is, for example, an integer multiple of 1000. If the accumulated number of balls is equal to or more than the specific number (step S3302: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3303. If the accumulated number of balls is less than the specific number (step S3302: No), the corresponding number is displayed. The rendering process ends.

<Steps S3303 to 3305>
In step S3303, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the round game effect screen 81 (see FIG. 40A) to the specific number payout display image display screen 86 (FIG. 40) in which the specific number payout image is displayed on the symbol display section 341. (See (B)), and further sets the specific number payout display image display screen flag to ON (step S3304), and turns off the specific number payout display flag set to ON for the round game. This is set (step S3305), and the payout display effect processing ends. This specific number payout display image display screen flag is a flag indicating whether the specific number payout image is displayed (whether the specific number payout image effect is being executed). In addition, in a case where the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to be on in step S3304, timing of the time from when the flag is turned on is started.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the specific number payout display image display screen flag set to on in step S3304 is set to on, and sets the specific number payout display image display screen flag to on. If it has been performed (Step S3306: Yes), the process proceeds to Step S3307, and if the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to off (Step S3306: No), the payout display effect processing is performed. finish.

<Step S3307>
In step S3307, the MPU 51 shifts to the specific number payout display image display screen (after the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to ON), and then performs a predetermined predetermined time (for example, 1 second to 10 seconds). Second) has elapsed. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the payout display effect has been performed for a predetermined time (whether the specific number payout display image has been displayed for a predetermined time). If the predetermined time has elapsed from the shift to the specific number payout display image display screen (step S3307: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S3308, and from the shift to the specific number payout display image display screen. If the predetermined time has not elapsed (step S3308: No), the payout display effect processing ends.

<Steps S3308 and S3309>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 changes the display screen from the specific number payout display image display screen 86 to a round game effect when the predetermined time has elapsed since the shift to the specific number payout display image display screen (step S3307: Yes). The screen 81 (see FIG. 40 (B) and FIG. 40 (C)) is returned, the specific number payout display image display screen flag is set to off (step S3309), and the payout display effect processing ends.

[Round game effect processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the round game effect process executed in step S3211 of the big hit game effect process of FIG. In the round game effect process, the round game effect in the opening / closing execution mode effect determined in step S2806 in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 33 and the visual inhibition effect determined in step S2808 are executed in the round game.

<Steps S3401 and S3402>
In step S3401, the MPU 51 executes a round game effect of the corresponding round, and sets a round game effect execution flag to ON (step S3402). The round game effect execution flag indicates whether a round game effect is being executed (open / close execution mode), and it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is set in step S3015 in the error processing of FIG. 42. Referenced for

<Steps S3403 and S3404>
In step S3403, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the promotion effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2906 of the visual impairment effect determination process of FIG. If it is the promotion effect execution round (step S3403: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the promotion effect (step S3404), and ends the round game effect process. Here, the promotion effect is executed when the round game effect start flag is ON (step S3207 in FIG. 44: Yes), that is, at the start of the round game, but the promotion effect may be executed at another timing. . For example, the promotion effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during an interval. If the visual impairment effect is executed during the interval, the execution timing of the specific character effect executed in the round game and the execution timing of the visual impairment effect can be prevented from overlapping, and the specific character effect is visually impaired effect. This can prevent visibility from being hindered.

  On the other hand, when the round is not the promotion effect execution round (step S3403: No), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to S3405 without executing the promotion effect.

<Steps S3405 and S3406>
In step S3405, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the execution round of the held extended villa finalization effect set in the RAM 512 in step S2911 of the visual recognition impediment effect determination process of FIG. If it is the execution round of the reserved extended-village determination effect (step S3405: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the reserved extended-village determination effect (step S3406), and then ends the round game rendering process. Here, similarly to the promoted production, the reserved extended-village confirmed production is executed when the round game production start flag is ON (Step S3207 in FIG. 44: Yes), that is, at the start of the round game, but at another timing. May be used to execute a held extended-village definite effect. For example, the held extended villa finalization effect may be executed after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the round game, or may be executed during an interval.

  On the other hand, when it is not the execution round of the held extended-village confirmation effect (Step S3405: No), the MPU 51 ends the round game rendering process without executing the reserved extended-village confirmation effect.

  As described above, in the gaming machine 10 according to the embodiment of the present invention, in the jackpot game, the specific character image effect mainly based on the selected character selected by the player is at a timing different from the visual impediment effect. It is executed in a specific round game (fixed to one round in this embodiment). Therefore, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character image production in the jackpot game without obstructing the visual recognition of the specific character image production.

  In the gaming machine 10, a specific character image effect is executed in a specific round such as one round. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the round game in which the specific character image effect is executed, it is possible to prevent the specific character image effect for the selected character from being missed by paying attention to the variable winning opening 316, for example.

  Furthermore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, while the error display image 871 is being displayed on the symbol display section 341, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the specific character effect, and the specific character effect is displayed based on the error occurrence image 871. When the display of the error occurrence image 871 is canceled by resolving the error when the visual recognition is disturbed, the disturbed specific character effect is executed after the error display is canceled. Thereby, even if the error occurrence image 871 hinders the visual recognition of the specific character effect, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific character effect in the big hit game.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. In other embodiments described below, the description of the same configuration and the same steps as the processing procedure of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment will be omitted. In addition, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-described first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the case of the jackpot game, a case where a specific character effect mainly performed by the selected character selected by the player is fixed to one round and executed, and the visual impediment effect is executed other than one round Was explained. That is, in the first embodiment, in the big hit game, a specific character effect (selection subject image effect) mainly based on the selected character (specific selection subject) selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual recognition inhibition effect. An example of such a case has been described.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment determines the execution timing of a specific character effect and the execution timing of a visual impediment effect, and when there is an overlap between these execution timings, the execution timing of one of the effects is re-determined. Is different from the embodiment.

  In the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when at least a part of the first timing for executing the specific character effect and the second timing for executing the visual impairment effect overlap, one of the first timing and the second timing is used. Is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual impediment effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the execution timing of the specific character production is determined at random without performing the specific character production fixed to one round which is the specific unit game as in the first embodiment described above. You. This allows the symbol display unit 341 to be noticed in order to confirm the specific character effect, so that the effect on the character other than the selected character can be positively appreciated, and the goodness of the character other than the selected character can be improved. You will be given the opportunity to confirm.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIGS. 47 and 48 respectively show a 5R open / close execution mode effect determination table and a 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table referred to in a jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of a visual impairment effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment.

  The present embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the execution timing of the specific character effect is determined at random as described above. 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 47) and 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (see FIG. 48) referred to in FIG. 49).

  As shown in FIG. 47, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any one of the first to fifth rounds. As shown in FIG. 48, the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the present embodiment is defined so that the selected character can be determined in any one of 1 to 16 rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 49, in the visual impairment effect determination process of the present embodiment, after a round game for executing a promotion effect as a visual impairment effect is temporarily determined (step S <b> 3501), a round for executing a temporarily set promotion effect is performed. If the game does not overlap with the round game in which the specific character effect is executed (Step S3502: No), the temporarily set round game in the promoted effect is set as it is as the round game in which the promoted effect is executed (Step S3503). On the other hand, when the provisionally set round game overlaps with the round game for executing the specific character effect (step S3502: Yes), the round game for executing the promotion effect is provisionally set again (step S3501).

  Similarly, after tentatively determining the round game for executing the held extended play confirmation effect as the visual obstruction effect (step S2907), the round game for executing the temporarily set reserved extended play confirmation effect is the round game for executing the promotion effect. Is not overlapped (step S2908: No), and if it does not overlap with the round game in which the specific character effect is executed (step S3504: No), the temporarily set round game of the promotion effect is held as it is, and the held extended villa finalization effect (Step S3505). On the other hand, if the provisionally set round game overlaps with the round game for executing the promotion effect and the round game for executing the specific character effect (Yes in step S2908 or S3502), the round game for executing the hold extended villa fixed effect is executed. The temporary setting is performed again (step S2907).

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the round game expected to exceed the specific number payout display overlaps with the round game performing the specific character effect (step S2912: Yes), the current round game is the final round game. (Step S3506: YES), that is, if there is no unfinished round game, a setting is made to display a specific number of payouts in the ending (step S3507). On the other hand, when the current round game is not the last round game (step S3506: No), that is, when there is an uncompleted round game, a specific number of payouts is displayed in the next round game after the round game in which the specific character effect is executed. Is set (step S3508).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the visual recognition inhibition production is performed in a case where the promotion effect and the holding extended residence confirmation effect as the visual inhibition effect and the round game performing the round game performing the specific character production are determined in an overlapping manner. Is determined again as a round game that does not overlap with a specific character effect. Also, a payout display effect as a visual impediment effect is executed in the next round game or ending after the execution of the specific character effect. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual impediment effect. In addition, by determining a round game in which a specific character effect is performed, and re-determining a round game in which a visual impediment effect is executed as necessary, the specific character effect is not fixed and fixed to a specific round game. , A loud game in which a specific character effect is randomly executed is determined. This allows the symbol display unit 341 to be noticed in order to confirm the specific character effect, so that the effect on the character other than the selected character can be positively appreciated, and the goodness of the character other than the selected character can be improved. You will be given the opportunity to confirm.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the specific character effect is determined first, and then the promotion effect and the reservation extended residence confirmation effect are randomly determined. However, the specific character effect is not executed in the promotion effect and the reservation extended residence confirmation effect. The timing may be intentionally determined. For example, a round game in which a specific character effect is not executed may be extracted, and a round game in which a promotion effect or a reserved extended-village effect is executed may be determined from among the extracted round games. Even in this case, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific character effect is obstructed by the visual impediment effect. In addition, since it is not only necessary to determine whether the execution timing of the promotion effect or the holding extended residence confirmation effect overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect, it is not necessary to redetermine the promotion effect or the holding consecutive residence confirmation effect, The processing load on the MPU 51 is reduced.

  In addition, a visual impediment effect such as a promotion effect or a hold extended villa finalizing effect is determined first, and then a specific character effect is determined.If the execution timing of the specific character effect overlaps the execution timing of the visual impairment effect, The execution timing of the character effect may be determined again. Furthermore, when the current round game is the final round game, the ball display effect was executed at the ending, but when there is no unfinished round game, the ball display effect without executing at the ending. May be omitted.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the specific character effect cannot be visually recognized at all by performing the error display has been described (see FIG. 43B). On the other hand, this embodiment is different from the above-described first embodiment in that an error display is performed so that a specific character effect can be visually recognized.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 and 51, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error processing procedure executed by the audio lamp control device, and FIG. 51 is a diagram illustrating an example of an error display on the symbol display unit in the error processing according to the present embodiment. .

  As shown in FIG. 50, in the error processing of the present embodiment, when an error occurs (Step S3001: Yes), it is determined whether or not a specific character effect is being executed (Step S3601), and the specific character effect is performed. Is being executed (step S3601: YES), the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341 (step S3002), and the specific character effect is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 51 (step S3002). S3602). There is no particular limitation on the reduction ratio and arrangement of the specific character effect as long as the visual recognition of the specific character effect is not hindered.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 so that the specific character effect can be visually recognized. That is, the specific character effect is executed in a predetermined partial area of the error display image 871 after being reduced from the display size before the error display image 871 is displayed, so that the error display image 871 is displayed as a symbol. Even when displayed on the unit 341, it can be visually recognized. Thereby, even when the error display image 871 is displayed on the symbol display section 341, the player can enjoy the selected character image effect in the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is reduced and executed in a partial area of the error display image 871, but as shown in FIG. 52, the error is displayed in a partial area of the specific character effect display screen 81. The display image 872 may be displayed. In the example of FIG. 52, the error display image 872 is displayed in the center of the upper part of the round game effect screen 81. However, the position at which the error display image 872 is displayed is on the left unless the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered. , Right, lower, corners, etc., other than those shown in FIG. Also, the size of the error display image 872 is not particularly limited as long as the visual recognition of the specific character effect is not hindered.

  Here, the error includes a normal error that does not need to be immediately reported after an error such as a ball clogging error occurs as described above. In such a normal error, the urgency of notifying the occurrence of the error is lower than that of the fraud detection error. Absent.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which, when an error occurs, the visual recognition of a specific character effect is hindered, and after the error is released, the specific character effect is executed in the jackpot game in which the error has occurred. On the other hand, the first embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that, when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the occurrence of the error, the specific character effect is executed in the next jackpot game, not in the jackpot game in which the error has occurred. Is different from the embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 shows an error process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 53, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, when the specific character effect stock flag is ON (step S3701: Yes), the timing for executing the specific character effect as the stock effect determine process is determined. You. In the error processing shown in FIG. 54, when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered due to the occurrence of an error in the error processing shown in FIG. 54 (step S3005: Yes), the shift to the previous jackpot game is triggered. It is set to ON on condition that the determined result is a probability change jackpot (step S3802).

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as a compensation when the visual recognition of the specific character effect is disturbed by displaying the error display image on the symbol display unit 341 in the previous jackpot game, the visual recognition in the special game is performed. The effect of the specific character corresponding to the hindrance is performed. Thereby, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered by the error display image, the player can sufficiently enjoy the selected character image effect in the next big hit game.

  In particular, if the visual recognition of a specific character effect is disturbed by the error display image in the probability change jackpot game, the specific character effect for the next time the visual recognition is disturbed in the jackpot game is executed. As a special benefit, the selected character image effect corresponding to the inhibition of the visual recognition is executed, and the player can enjoy the special benefit. Also, on condition that the jackpot game is being executed, a privilege in the case where the error display image is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 and the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered is hardly a privilege. This can be prevented from being performed earlier.

  In addition, in the stock effect determination process in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 53, for example, in a single jackpot game, in addition to the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game, a specific character effect performed by the stock is added. It may be determined that the specific character effect is executed two or more times. In this case, the specific character effect determined by the jackpot game and the specific character effect executed by the specific character effect stock executed by the stock may be determined as different effects, and the specific character effect executed two or more times may be determined. One of the effects may be executed at the opening, and the remaining specific character effects may be executed at the round game.

  If the specific character effect is determined in this way, if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is disturbed by the error display image in the previous jackpot game, the selected character image effect is replaced with another specific character effect in the jackpot game as compensation. Is performed as a different production. Therefore, by performing the same specific character production two or more times, it is possible to prevent the user from feeling tired of the specific character production. In particular, by executing the specific character production performed as compensation at the opening, the feeling of getting tired of the specific character production as compared to the case where the same specific character production is performed two or more times in a plurality of round games. Holding can be effectively suppressed. In addition, the player can receive compensation as a result of the visual recognition of the specific character effect being hindered by the error display image as a privilege that is performed as an effect different from other selected character image effects. You can enjoy more.

  Further, the specific character production performed by the stock may be performed as a special specific character production with a low application rate or a special specific character production limitedly performed only as a specific character production at the time of stocking. By doing so, a special specific character effect is executed in the next big hit game as compensation for hindering the visual recognition of the specific character effect. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific character effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce the frustration and dissatisfaction of the player at that time by executing the special specific character effect.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a specific character effect mainly composed of a selected character selected by a player is executed in a single round in a jackpot game.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state (in the present embodiment, the symbol display unit 341 displays the main symbol at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed). The first embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the effect on the character in the executed final image game effect (opportunistic game image effect) is executed in at least one of the opening and the one round.

  By the way, in some conventional gaming machines, in a jackpot game, there is a character game that displays a still image such as a character introduction image in addition to a moving image such as a PV (promotion video) of a character appearing in a variable game effect.

  However, in the conventional gaming machine, the effect for the character in the jackpot game is determined at random, and the effect character (specific effect subject) which is mainly displayed in the reach effect (specific effect subject image effect) in the variable game effect. ) Was not relevant. On the other hand, the player sometimes feels a great deal of attachment and appreciation to the character in the variable game that has triggered the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the effect character effect ((() for the effect character in the opportunity game image effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing in the variable game that has triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state. Special game) specific effect subject image effect) is executed in at least one of the opening and one round. Therefore, the effect character effect is executed in the big hit game in a relatively short time after the end of the variable game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the final image game effect in the variable game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the effect character in the final image game effect even in the jackpot game in a state in which the lingering effect such as the reach effect in the variable game which has become the jackpot trigger remains. Thereby, the production character can be further enjoyed in the big hit game.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 56 is referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of a jackpot game character effect data table. FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG.

  In the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment shown in FIG. 55, before determining the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect (before step S2803), the variable game corresponding to the variable game that triggered the shift to the jackpot game. The final image game effect type executed at the timing when the main symbol in the effect is stopped and displayed, and the effect character in the final image game effect are specified (step S3901).

  Then, the MPU 51 refers to the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56, and determines an effect to be executed at the opening (Step S2802). Also, the MPU 51 determines the effect to be executed in the opening / closing execution mode with reference to the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 and the opening / closing execution mode effect deciding table shown in FIG. 57 (steps S3903 and S3904).

  Here, the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 56 determines the character type to appear in the opening effect of the jackpot game, and also determines the character type for determining the scenario in the round game effect of the jackpot game. The MPU 51 refers to the steps S3902 and S3904 in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. In the jackpot game character effect data table, the character type to appear in the opening effect and the round according to the final image game effect type (reach effect type) executed at the timing when the main symbol in the variable game is stopped and displayed. A character type for determining a game effect scenario is defined. In addition, the character type for determining the round game effect scenario is defined according to the type of jackpot (probably variable jackpot and normal jackpot) and the presence or absence of the execution of the held consecutive villa fixed effect.

  Specifically, in the variable game production that became the trigger of the jackpot game, when the final image game production is super reach productions Y1 to Y5, the opening character is not a production character in super reach productions Y1 to Y5, An unselected character that is not the selected character among the characters 1 to 4 is determined. That is, when the final image game effects are super reach effects Y1 to Y5, at the opening, the effect character effect for the effect character is not executed, and the specific character effect for the selected character is not executed.

  On the other hand, when the final image game effects are super reach effects Y1 to Y5, the effect characters 5 to 9 in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 are determined as characters for determining the scenario of the round game effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 57, in the open / close execution mode effect determination table referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process in FIG. 55, these are determined according to the characters 1 to 9 for determining the round game effect scenario. An effect scenario table is individually set for characters 1 to 9. In the effect scenario table for any of the characters 1 to 9, the scenario in which the effect characters 5 to 9 in the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 are executed in one round of the round game is determined. For example, if the final image game production is a super-reach production Y1, the production character production for the character 9 is performed in a round game in accordance with the “character 9 production scenario table” for the character 9 that is the production character in the super reach production Y1. A scenario to be executed in one round of the effect is determined.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 56, when the final image game production is the special reach productions Z1 to Z5, any one of the production characters 1 to 4 or the characters 1 to 20 in the special reach productions Z1 to Z5 is used as the opening character. Everyone) is determined. That is, when the final image game production is a super-reach production Y1 to Y5, in the opening, a production character production for the production character is executed, and when there are a plurality of production characters, a production character production in which those characters are displayed is executed. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the final image game effect is the special reach effect Z1 to Z5, as the character for determining the scenario of the round game effect, whether the determination result that triggered the transition to the jackpot game is a probability change jackpot, The selected character is determined when the reserved villa is determined, and is not a probability change jackpot. When the reserved villa is not determined, the selected character is not the selected character among the characters 5 to 9 (other than the characters 1 to 4). A non-selected character is determined. That is, when the final image game effect is a super-reach effect Y1 to Y5, in the opening / closing execution mode, a specific character effect with respect to the selected character is one round of the round game in the case of a probability change jackpot or a hold extended villa. (See FIG. 57). In this case, when the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect is executed in one round as the effect character effect.

  When the final image game effects are the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the opening character and the character for determining the round game effect scenario. On the other hand, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the selected character is determined as the effect character. That is, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5, the effect character effect (specific selected character) for the effect character (selected character) in the normal reach effect X1 to X5 in both the opening and the round of the round game. Be executed. In other words, when the final image game effect is the normal reach effect X1 to X5 and the effect character and the selected character are the same, the specific character effect (effect character) for the selected character in both the opening and the one round of the round game. Is produced).

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the type of the effect character in the final image game effect, and the scenario effect (character effect in one round) in the round game is determined. The character to perform is determined according to the reach type, the rendered character type, the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot and the normal jackpot) in the final image game effect, and the presence or absence of the execution of the reserved extended villa. The effect determined in this way is executed by the MPU 51 in the big hit game. As a result, in the present embodiment, the effect character effect for the effect character in the final image game effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the one round, and the execution in other than the opening and the one round is limited. Thereby, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a style that reflects the final image game effect in the variable game that triggered the shift to the jackpot game.

  In the present embodiment, the production character production is performed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the execution in the other than the opening and the first round is restricted. In the case of a gaming situation that is advantageous to the player, such as in the case of a jackpot game, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at timings other than the opening and one round. Thereby, the player can enjoy the production character effect a plurality of times as a privilege in the case of an advantageous game situation.

  In addition, when the effect character in the final image game effect and the selected character are the same as in the normal reach effect X1 to X5, and when the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the one round, the opening and the one round are performed. It is conceivable to execute the effect character effect as a different effect. In this case, the player can enjoy two different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and in the one round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that has been executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described. The specific character effect on the character in the triggered game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and the one round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the round game effect scenario in the open / close execution mode is determined based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 57, but a character for determining the round game effect scenario is selected. When the character is a character, an effect scenario (round game effect) in the open / close execution mode may be determined based on the open / close execution mode effect determination table (see FIGS. 47 and 48) in the second embodiment. . In this case, the round game in which the specific character effect on the selected character is executed in the open / close execution mode is determined even in a case other than the first round (after the second round). In other words, when the production character is the same as the selected character, such as when the final image game production is a normal reach production X1 to X5 production, the production character production (specific character production) for the production character (selected character) is performed. This is executed in a round game other than the opening and the first round, for example, the second round and thereafter. Thereby, in order to confirm the production character production (specific character production) for the production character (selected character), it is possible to pay attention to the symbol display unit 341 in the round game, and thus characters other than the production character (selected character) Can be positively appreciated, and an opportunity to confirm the goodness of a character other than the production character (selected character) is given. Note that if the production character satisfies a condition other than the same as the selected character, for example, if the reach type is a special reach production, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the transition to the jackpot game will be a variable probability jackpot. In such a case, the effect character may be executed in a round game after the second round.

[Sixth Embodiment]
In the above-described fifth embodiment, the character in the opening effect is determined according to the reach type and the effect character type in the final image game effect, and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) is determined. Character for the final image game effect is determined according to the reach type, the effect character type, the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot and the normal jackpot), and whether or not the holding rendezvous is executed. The case has been described where the effect character effect is performed in at least one of the opening and the one round.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the character for determining the opening production character and the production scenario (character production in one round) in the round game is defined according to the reach type and the production character type in the final image game production. Although the fifth embodiment is similar to the fifth embodiment described above, not only the character for determining the production scenario (character production in one round) in the round game but also the character in the opening production is the jackpot. The fifth embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that it is defined according to the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the lottery result that triggered the transition to the game.

  In the present embodiment, the character for determining the opening production character and the production scenario (character production in one round) in the round game is the jackpot game in addition to the reach type and the production character type in the final image game production. Is determined in accordance with the jackpot type in the lottery result that triggered the shift to, and the jackpot game effect determined as such is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a style reflecting the lottery result (game state of the jackpot game) for the variable game that has triggered the shift to the jackpot game. For example, when a certain reach effect (normal reach effects X1 to X5 of the selected character (in this embodiment, X1 to X5 (see FIG. 58)) becomes a big hit in the case of a probability change big hit game state which is more advantageous to the player, the opening and one round are performed. Then, an effect character effect (specific character effect) for the effect character (selected character) of the normal reach effect, which is the final image game effect, is executed. Thereby, in the case of an advantageous probable jackpot game, the player can enjoy the effect on the effect character (selected character) in the jackpot game continuously from the final image game effect while leaving the lingering sound.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58 focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described fifth embodiment. Here, FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit game character effect data table referred to in the big hit game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment. In FIG. 58, the OP effect is an abbreviation for the opening effect, and the R scenario is an abbreviation for the round game effect scenario.

  In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 58, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, which is a trigger for transition to the jackpot game state. If the determination result for the variable game is a probability change jackpot, a specific character production (producing character production) for the selected character (producing character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (producing character) is selected as a character for selecting a round game production scenario. ) Is determined. In other words, if the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the effect character in the final variable game (selected character) in both the opening and the one round, provided that it is a probability change jackpot. Is effected (specific character effect). On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, neither the production character nor the selected character is displayed in the opening production (specific character production (production character production) is not executed), and the production character (selected character) is used as a round game production scenario. ) Is selected.

  In the super-reach productions Y1 to Y5 and the special reach productions Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that has caused the transition to the jackpot game state is a positive change big success, the final image game production at the opening. An effect for the character is determined, and an effect scenario for the selected character is selected as a round game effect scenario. Conversely, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is usually a jackpot, the selected character is determined as a character in the opening effect, and a round game effect scenario is determined. The effect character is determined as the character of. As described above, by determining the character for the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario (character effect in one round) in the round game, the effect for the selected character in one of the opening and one round also in the present embodiment. The effect for the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game or the variable game is executed, and the execution other than the opening and one round is restricted. This allows the player to anticipate the jackpot type, and can enjoy the jackpot game by focusing on the character of the opening effect and the character of the effect performed in one round while considering the reach type. .

  In the present embodiment, the production character production (specific character) is executed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the execution outside the opening and the first round is restricted. For example, when performing the promotion production, In the case where the game situation is advantageous to the player, such as in the case where the reserved extended villa is fixed, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and one round.

  In the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the production character may be the same as the selected character. However, when the production character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution mode is performed. In both cases, an effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed in only one of the rounds of the opening and opening / closing execution modes.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result which triggered the shift to the jackpot game is a probability change jackpot, the final image game effect is performed as in the case where the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game effect in the variable game. In the case where the effect character is the same as the selected character and the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the one round, the effect character effect may be executed as a different effect in the opening and the one round. In this case, the player can enjoy two different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and in the one round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that has been executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described. The specific character effect on the character in the triggered game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and the one round.

[Seventh embodiment]
In the above-described sixth embodiment, the character in the opening effect and the character for determining the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are the lottery that triggered the shift to the jackpot game. The case where the result is defined according to the jackpot type (probably variable jackpot and normal jackpot) in the result has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the character in the opening effect and the effect scenario in the round game (character effect in one round) are defined as the jackpot type divided into the 5R jackpot and the 16R jackpot. 6 is different from the sixth embodiment. That is, in the present embodiment, a character in an opening effect and an effect scenario in a round game (character effect in one round) are defined according to the number of jackpot rounds.

  In this embodiment, similarly to the above-described sixth embodiment, the character for determining the opening production character and the production scenario (character production in one round) in the round game is an opportunity to shift to the jackpot game. Is determined according to the jackpot type in the lottery result, and the jackpot game effect determined in this way is executed in the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the jackpot game in a style that reflects the lottery result (game state of the jackpot game) of the variable game that triggered the shift to the jackpot game. For example, when the player is in a 16R (probable change) jackpot game state that is more advantageous to the player, and a jackpot is achieved with a specific reach effect (in this embodiment, the normal reach effects X1 to X5 of the selected character), the opening and one-round normal reach An effect character (specific character effect) for the effect character effect (selected character) of effects X1 to X5 is executed. Thus, in the case of an advantageous 16R (probable change) jackpot game, the player can enjoy the jackpot game continuously from the final image game effect while leaving the lingering sound.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 59, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit game character effect data table referred to in the big hit game effect determination processing executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment.

  In the jackpot game character effect data table shown in FIG. 59, for example, in the normal reach effects X1 to X5, when the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the transition to the jackpot game state is triggered. If the result of the lottery for the variable game is 16R jackpot, the specific character production (producing character production) for the selected character (producing character) is determined at the opening, and the selected character (character as a character for selecting the round game production scenario) Effect character) is determined. In other words, when the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game is the same as the selected character, the effect character (selected character) in the final variable game in both the opening and the one round, provided that it is a 16R jackpot. Is effected (specific character effect). On the other hand, if the lottery result is a 5R jackpot, the effect on the selected character and the effect character in the final image game effect is not determined at the opening, and the selected character (effect character) as the character for selecting the round game effect scenario is not determined. ) Is determined.

  In the super-reach productions Y1 to Y5 and the special reach productions Z1 to Z5, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot game state is a 5R jackpot, the final image game production at the opening. An effect for the character is determined, and an effect scenario for the selected character is selected as a round game effect scenario. Conversely, when the lottery result for the variable game that triggered the transition to the jackpot gaming state is 16R jackpot, the selected character is determined as the character in the opening effect, and the round game effect scenario is determined. The effect character is determined as the character of. By determining the character for the opening effect and the character for determining the scenario effect (character effect in one round) in the round game as described above, in the present embodiment also, the effect for the selected character in one of the opening and one round The effect for the effect character in the final image game effect of the variable game and the variable game is executed, and the execution other than the opening and the one round is restricted, so that the player can expect the jackpot type. Thereby, the player can enjoy the big hit game by paying attention to the character of the effect performed in the opening and one round while considering the reach type.

  In the present embodiment, the production character production is performed in at least one of the opening and the first round, and the execution in the other than the opening and the first round is restricted. If the game situation is advantageous for the player as in the case where it has been determined, the effect character effect may be exceptionally executed at a timing other than the opening and one round.

  In the super reach effects Y1 to Y5 and the special reach effects Z1 to Z5, the production character may be the same as the selected character. However, when the production character is the same as the selected character, one round of the opening and opening / closing execution mode is performed. In both cases, an effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect character effect (specific character effect) is executed in only one of the rounds of the opening and opening / closing execution modes.

  Furthermore, when the lottery result that triggered the shift to the jackpot game is a 16R jackpot, as in the case where the normal reach effects X1 to X5 are executed as the final image game effects in the variable game, the final image game effects In the case where the effect character is the same as the selected character and the effect character effect is executed in both the opening and the one round, the effect character effect may be executed as a different effect in the opening and the one round. In this case, the player can enjoy two different effects for the effect character (selected character) twice in the opening and in the one round.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the round game effect scenario is determined according to the reach type, but the round game effect scenario may be determined regardless of the reach type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the opportunity game image effect is the final image game effect that has been executed at the timing when the main symbol is stopped and displayed has been described. The specific character effect on the character in the triggered game image effect may be executed in at least one of the opening and the one round.

[Eighth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the visual impediment effect of the jackpot game effect deciding process, the accumulated number of balls is estimated, and the specific number of emerged ball display effects that are the visual impediment effects are the specific characters whose main character is the selected character. The case where the effect is not executed during execution of the effect has been described.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while the accumulated payout number is monitored in real time, the payout display is performed during the execution of the jackpot game, and the specific payout number display effect is prevented from being executed during the execution of the specific character effect. This is different from the above-described first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the payout display effect processing executed by the audio lamp control device.

  As shown in FIG. 60, in the payout display effect processing of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a payout display carryover flag that is set on in step S4005 described later is on (step S4001). The payout display carryover flag is a flag for displaying a specific number of payout display images after the end of the specific character effect, and when the accumulated number of payouts has become equal to or more than the specific number during execution of the specific character effect (steps S4002 and S4004). Is set to ON (step S4005).

  When the payout display carryover flag is set to OFF (step S4001: No), the cumulative payout number counted in the payout counting processing of step S2712 in the command determination processing of FIG. 30 is equal to or more than the N-th specific number. It is determined whether or not. Here, N is a positive integer, for example, the N-th specified number is 1000N.

  Here, in the payout counting process of the first embodiment described above, only the number of winning balls for winning in the variable winning opening 316 is added as the cumulative number of payouts. On the other hand, in the payout counting process of the present embodiment, the accumulated payout number for the winning in the variable winning opening 316 is calculated by subtracting the number of outgoing game balls (number of outgoing balls) during the jackpot game from the cumulative payout number for winning in the variable winning opening 316. The so-called difference ball number is adopted, and when the difference ball number becomes a specific number or more, a specific number of payouts display effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when counting the number of accumulated balls by differentiating the number of launched game balls (number of out balls) at the time of the jackpot game, a round game in which the accumulated number of balls is equal to or more than a specific number is accurately estimated. Because it is not easy, the payout display is performed during the execution of the jackpot game by monitoring the cumulative payout number in real time in consideration of the point.

  When the accumulated number of balls is equal to or more than the N-th specified number (step S4002: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the processing to step S4003, and when the accumulated number of balls is less than the N-th specified number (step S4002: No), The process moves to step S3306.

  If the accumulated number of balls is equal to or more than the N-th specific number (step S4002: YES), the specific number set in the RAM 512 is updated from the N-th specific number to the (N + 1) -th specific number (step S4003). That is, the MPU 51 changes the number of payouts to be determined in the specific number payout display to the next specific number. Here, the (N + 1) -th specific number is, for example, the (N-th) specific number + 1000 (= 1000 (N + 1)).

  Next, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a specific character effect is being performed (step S4004). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display timing of the specific number of payout display images overlaps with the execution timing of the specific character effect.

  If the specific character effect is being executed (step S4004: YES), the MPU 51 sets the payout display carryover flag to ON (step S4005), and ends the payout display effect processing. That is, the MPU 51 sets the payout display carryover flag to ON to carry over the display of the specific number payout display image until the specific character effect ends.

  On the other hand, when the specific character effect is not being executed (step S4004: No), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 to a specific number of odd-ball display image display screen 86 (see FIG. 40B) (step S4004). S3903). That is, when the specific character effect is not being executed, the MPU 51 displays the specific number payout display image when the cumulative payout number becomes equal to or more than the specific number.

  On the other hand, when the payout display carryover flag is set to ON (step S4001: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific character effect has been completed (step S4006). If the specific character effect has been completed (step S4006: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the payout display carryover flag to off (step S4007), and changes the display screen of the symbol display unit 341 to the specific number payout display image display screen. 86 (see FIG. 40B) (step S3903).

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the specific character effect is performed during the execution of the specific ball number display effect before performing the specific ball number display effect that is the visual obstruction effect. If it is determined that the specific character effect is to be executed during the execution, a specific ball number display effect is executed after the end of the specific character effect. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being obstructed by the specific number-of-balls display effect.

[Ninth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot game effect determination process, the visual recognition inhibition effect is determined after the open / close execution mode effect is determined, and the visual inhibition effect is executed during the execution of the specific character effect with the selected character as the main character. The case where it is not performed has been described.

  On the other hand, the present embodiment determines the opening / closing execution mode effect after determining the visual impairment effect, and prevents the visual impairment effect from being executed during execution of the specific character effect with the selected character as the main character. This is different from the first embodiment.

  Hereinafter, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63, focusing on differences from the gaming machine 10 according to the above-described first embodiment. Here, FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the jackpot game effect determination process executed by the audio lamp control device of the present embodiment, and FIGS. 62 and 63 are respectively referred to in the jackpot game effect determination process of FIG. 61. It is a figure which shows an example of the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 5R and the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for 16R.

  As shown in FIG. 61, in the jackpot game effect determination process of the present embodiment, a visual impediment effect determination process for determining a visual impediment effect is performed (step S4101), and thereafter, it is necessary to determine an opening / closing execution mode effect. The processing is executed (steps S4102 to S4105).

  In the visual impairment effect determination process (step S4101), unlike the first embodiment, the visual impairment effect can be determined including one round. However, a round game in which a visual impairment effect is executed is determined so that the promotion effect and the reserved extended-village effect are not executed in the same round, that is, a plurality of visual impediment effects are not executed in the same round.

  If a round game for performing a visual impediment effect is determined (step S4101), the MPU 51 determines a round game for executing a specific character effect on the selected character (step S4102). Specifically, the MPU 51 determines to execute a specific character effect in a round game that does not overlap with a round game in which a visual impediment effect is executed, that is, a round game in which a visual impediment effect is not executed. For example, as a visual impediment effect, in the case of executing a specific number of ball display effect in two rounds, a reservation extended casino effect in three rounds, and a promotion effect in four rounds, the MPU 51 performs one specific character effect without executing the visual impediment effect. Decide to run in rounds or 5 rounds. Whether to perform the specific character effect in one round or five rounds is determined by lottery or the like.

  Note that the MPU 51 may decide to execute the specific character effect in one round when the visual impediment effect is not executed in one round. The specific character effect may be executed in both the opening effect and the opening / closing execution mode effect.

  When the MPU 51 determines the round game for executing the specific character production (step S4102), the MPU 51 specifies the jackpot type and the selected character (step S4103), and according to the round game for executing the specific character production, the jackpot type and the selected character type. Then, an open / close execution mode effect determination table for determining an effect to be executed in each round game in the open / close execution mode is determined (step S4104).

  Here, FIG. 62 shows a 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, and FIG. 63 shows a 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table.

  The 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 62 is a table that is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the 5R jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect. That is, when the jackpot type is the 5R jackpot, the MPU 51 determines the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect using the same 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table without distinction between the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot. Of course, different 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination tables may be prepared for the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot, and the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect may be determined based on these tables.

  The 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and five effect scenario tables from 1R selected effect scenario table to 5R selected effect scenario table are set for each selected character. Have been. For example, the 1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 is an effect scenario table selected when a specific character effect for the selected character is executed in 1R. The 5R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1 is a 5R character effect effect table for 5R character 1. It is an effect scenario table selected by. For example, when the round game for executing the specific character effect is one round, the jackpot type is 5R sure-change jackpot, and the selected character is the character 1, the MPU 51 sets the 5R open / close execution mode effect as an open / close execution mode effect scenario. The “1R selection effect scenario table for 5R character 1” in the determination table is determined.

  Although FIG. 62 shows only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for character 1, similarly, for characters 2 to 9, five different round games for executing a specific character effect on the selected character are different. A production scenario table has been set. That is, in the present embodiment, any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character. Therefore, the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table includes five characters corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9 in total. Includes 45 effect scenario tables.

  The 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table shown in FIG. 63 is a table which is referred to by the MPU 51 when determining the 16R jackpot opening / closing execution mode effect. The 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table includes an effect scenario table corresponding to the selected character, and 16 effect scenario tables from 1R selected effect scenario table to 16R selected effect scenario table are set for each selected character. ing. Although FIG. 63 shows only the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table for the character 1, the characters 2 to 9 similarly have 16 different round games for executing the specific character effect on the selected character. A production scenario table has been set. That is, in the present embodiment, since any one of the characters 1 to 9 can be selected as the selected character, the 16R open / close execution mode effect determination table includes 16 characters corresponding to each of the characters 1 to 9 in total. 171 effect scenario tables are included.

  In both the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, each effect scenario table includes an effect scenario type, a round game effect character type, and a scenario type counter. The effect scenario type, the round game effect character type, and the scenario type counter are the same as those in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table of the first embodiment described with reference to FIG. 34, and thus description thereof will be omitted. I do.

  On the other hand, in the 5R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table and the 16R opening / closing execution mode effect determination table, the specific character effect for the selected character is always executed once in any round game in the opening / closing execution mode. Therefore, the player can always enjoy the specific character effect on the selected character in one big hit game.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 61, when the MPU 51 determines the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table (step S4104), the MPU 51 determines an opening / closing execution mode effect scenario based on the opening / closing execution mode effect determination table determined in step S4104 ( Step S4105).

  In the present embodiment, after determining the round game in which the visual impairment effect is executed, the round game in which the specific character effect for the selected character is executed while avoiding the round game in which the visual impairment effect is executed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific character effect from being obstructed by the visual impediment effect.

  In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is executed once in any one of the round games. for that reason,

  In the present embodiment, the specific character effect is always executed once in any of the round games in the open / close execution mode. However, when the game situation is advantageous to the player, for example, when the hold extended residence is determined. In the case of a jackpot game which is an advantageous gaming situation for such a player, for example, when the next jackpot is scheduled to be executed relatively, such as in the case of a probability change jackpot, a specific character effect is executed. It may not be done. Thereby, the player can enjoy the big hit game by paying attention to whether the specific character effect is executed in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode. If the specific character effect is not executed in the jackpot game because of the advantageous gaming situation for the player, the specific character effect may be performed a plurality of times in the next jackpot game. For example, a specific character effect may be executed in all round games in the opening and closing execution mode, or a specific character effect in at least one of the opening and ending in addition to all round games in the opening and closing execution mode. It may be executed. Thereby, when the specific character effect is not executed in the previous big hit, the player can enjoy the specific character effect in the current big hit game up to the last big hit game. In addition, regarding executing a specific character effect in all round games in the opening and closing execution mode, when it is a probability change jackpot, as in the case where a reserved consecutive mansion is confirmed, it is a condition that is an advantageous game situation for the player. Is also good.

[Summary of Invention]
Hereinafter, an outline of the invention extracted from each of the above embodiments will be additionally described. In addition, in order to provide understanding of the correspondence between each supplementary note and each embodiment, the description may be given with reference numerals and the like for convenience, but the invention according to the supplementary note is limited to a specific configuration given the reference numerals. Not something. Further, each configuration and each processing function described below can be selected and arbitrarily combined.

[Appendix A1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect is a game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as a subject, and the image display. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
The gaming machine, characterized in that the effect execution means (51) includes means for setting the specific selection subject image effect to be executed at a timing different from the visual impairment effect in the special game.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect for the specific effect subject selected by the player is executed at a timing different from the visual recognition inhibition effect. Therefore, the player can fully enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game without hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix A2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value (game balls) to a player,
The effect executing means (51) includes:
At a first timing set in a first period in which a predetermined specific unit game of the plurality of unit games is executed, the specific selection subject image effect is executed,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A1, wherein the visual impairment effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix A3]
The gaming machine according to attachment A2, wherein the first period is a period in which a first unit game (one round) executed first among the plurality of unit games is executed.

[Appendix A4]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A3, wherein the second period is a period in which a unit game other than the first unit game out of the plurality of unit games is executed.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A2 to A4, a specific selection subject image effect is executed in a specific unit game such as the first unit game. Therefore, since the player can grasp in advance the unit game in which the specific selection subject image effect is executed, the player may miss the specific selection subject image effect such as the selected character image effect by paying attention to the variable winning opening. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A5]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to determine at least one of the first timing and the second timing when determining a first timing for executing the specific selection subject image effect and a second timing for executing the visual impairment effect. When a part overlaps, one of the first timing and the second timing is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap with each other. Gaming machine.

[Appendix A6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value (game balls) to a player,
The game according to supplementary note A5, wherein the effect determination unit (51) determines the first timing and the second timing during a period in which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed. Machine.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A5 and A6, the first timing and the second timing when at least a part of the first timing of executing the specific selection subject image effect and the second timing of executing the visual impairment effect are overlapped. Is re-determined to a timing at which the first timing and the second timing do not overlap. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific selection subject image effect is obstructed from being visually recognized by the visual obstruction effect. Further, the first timing for executing the specific selection subject image effect is determined, and the first timing is re-determined as necessary, so that the specific selection subject image effect is not fixed and fixed to a specific unit game. The execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect is determined at random. Thereby, since it is possible to pay attention to the image display means in order to confirm the specific selection subject image effect, it is possible to positively appreciate the effect for the selection subject other than the specific selection subject, An opportunity to confirm the goodness of the selection subject is given.

[Appendix A7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value (game balls) to a player,
A duplication determination unit (51) that determines whether the specific selection subject image effect is to be executed during execution of the viewing inhibition effect before executing the viewing inhibition effect;
The rendering execution means (51), when the overlap determination means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image rendering is to be performed during the execution of the visual recognition inhibition rendering, after the specific selection subject rendering is completed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, wherein the visual impairment effect is performed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A7, it is determined whether the specific selection subject image effect is performed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect before the visual inhibition effect is performed, and the specific selection subject image is performed during the execution of the visual inhibition effect. When it is determined that the effect is to be executed, the visual recognition inhibition effect is executed after the end of the specific selection subject image effect. Therefore, it is possible to avoid in advance that the specific selection subject image effect is obstructed from being visually recognized by the visual obstruction effect.

[Appendix A8]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games that provide a player with a game value,
The production execution means
The specific selection subject image effect is executed during a unit game period in which any one of the plurality of unit games is executed,
The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A1, wherein the visual impairment effect is executed during an interval period between the unit games.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A8, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the unit game period, while the visual impairment effect is executed in the interval period between the unit games. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect and the execution timing of the viewing inhibition effect from being overlapped, and to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being obstructed by the viewing inhibition effect.

[Appendix A9]
The specific selection subject image effect is executed by the image display means (341) based on a multilayer image obtained by superimposing a plurality of images,
The visual obstruction effect is an image in which an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information is displayed on the image display means (341) in a visible layer of the multilayer image. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A8, wherein the gaming machine is an effect.

[Appendix A10]
The information notification image is an image (861) for notifying that the integrated value of the game value given to the player has exceeded a predetermined game value during the execution period of the one or more special games satisfying a predetermined condition. The gaming machine according to supplementary note A9, characterized in that:

[Appendix A11]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to attachment A9 or A8, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) indicating or indicating that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix A12]
Holding means (41) for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held notification game held by the holding means (41);
Further comprising
The information notification image includes, in the determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage unit (412), an image that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A9 to A11, wherein the game machine is an image (851) that suggests or clearly indicates that the game has occurred.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes A9 to A12, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being disturbed by various information notification images serving as visual recognition inhibiting effects.

[Appendix A13]
The effect unit (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio of the image display unit (341) covering the display screen is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepare
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes A1 to A12, wherein the visual obstruction effect is a moving member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix A14]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to supplementary note A13, wherein the movable member operation effect is an effect indicating or indicating that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix A15]
Holding means (41) for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held notification game held by the holding means (41);
Further comprising
The movable member operation effect includes, in the determination result for the suspension notification game stored in the suspension result storage means (412), a transition to the special game state after the execution of the suspension notification game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A13 or A14, characterized in that the effect is to indicate or indicate that the player is present.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note A9 to Supplementary Note A15, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being disturbed by various effects such as a movable member operation effect, a promotion effect, and a reservation extended residence operation effect that are visual impairment effects. it can.

[Appendix B1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
A specific selection subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters), and a priority display image (871, 872) including an image display means (341) for displaying a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) in the special game and the notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result. (Such as 341)
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect includes, as the game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as a subject,
Execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect in the image display means (341) from the start of the display of the priority display image in the image display means (341) to the end of the display of the priority display image A game machine further comprising an effect determination means (51) for determining whether or not the game is a game.

[Appendix B2]
The gaming machine according to attachment B1, wherein the priority display image is an abnormality notification image (871, 872) indicating that an abnormality has occurred in the gaming machine.

[Appendix B3]
The effect judging means (51) is configured such that, when the specific display subject image effect is being executed in the image display means (341) at the time when the display of the priority display image is started, the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1 or B2, wherein the timing is determined to be the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix B4]
The effect determination means (51) is configured to, when the execution start timing of the specific selection subject image effect arrives from the start of the display of the priority display image to the end of the display of the priority display image, the image display The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B1 to B3, wherein it is determined that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect in the means (341).

[Appendix B5]
When the effect determining means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B1 or B4, wherein after the game is completed, the specific selection subject image effect is executed.

[Appendix B6]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value (game balls) to a player,
When the effect determining means (51) determines that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to attachment B5, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in an undigested unit game of the plurality of unit games started after the end of the game.

[Appendix B7]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) that provide a player with a game value (game balls), and an ending that shifts after completion of the plurality of unit games.
The effect execution means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect in the ending when it is determined by the effect determination means (51) that it is the execution timing of the specific selection subject image effect. The gaming machine according to supplementary note B5.

[Appendix B8]
The effect executing means (51) includes: when there is no undigested unit game of the plurality of unit games started after the display of the priority display image on the image display means (341) is completed, The gaming machine according to attachment B7, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the ending.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Notes B1 to B8, the specific selection subject image effect is displayed from the time when the display of the priority display image such as the abnormality notification image is started until the display of the priority display image ends on the image display means. It is determined whether or not the processing is being executed by the image display means. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered by the priority display image. Thus, when the priority display image hinders the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect, the compensation can be performed. For example, when the display of the priority display image is canceled by, for example, eliminating an abnormality when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is disturbed by the priority display image, the blocked specific selection subject image effect is displayed on the priority display image. After the display is canceled, it is possible to take measures such as executing the unfinished unit game or ending. Thereby, even when the priority display image hinders the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game.

[Appendix B9]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51), and a special specific selection subject image effect having a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect has been executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes B5 to B8, wherein the special specific selection subject image effect is executed after the end.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B9, if the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the display of the priority display image, after the display of the priority display image is released, the special specific selection subject having a low execution probability as the specific selection subject image effect is produced. An image effect is executed. That is, a rare effect or a premier effect for the specific selection subject is executed as compensation for hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration and dissatisfaction of the player at that time by executing the special specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix B10]
When the effect determining means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect has been executed, the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes B5 to B9, wherein, after finishing, whether to execute the specific selection subject image effect is determined by lottery.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B10, the specific selection subject image effect is executed by winning the lottery when the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is disturbed. That is, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, there are cases where the specific selection subject image effect is executed and cases where it is not executed. For this reason, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise due to the execution of the specific selection subject image effect after the display of the priority display image is completed, and to improve the interest in the special game.

[Appendix B11]
The gaming machine according to claim B1, wherein the effect executing means (51) displays the priority display image on the image display means (341) so that the specific selected subject image effect can be visually recognized.

[Appendix B12]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
Displaying the priority display image on the entire or substantially entire display screen of the image display means (341);
The supplementary feature B11, wherein the selection specific selection subject image effect is reduced from a display size before displaying the priority display image, and is executed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image. The described gaming machine.

[Appendix B13]
The effect execution means (51) displays the priority display image on the display screen in a part of a display screen of the specific selection subject image effect in the image display means (341). The gaming machine according to supplementary note B11.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes B11 to B13, the priority display image is displayed on the image display unit so that the specific selection subject image effect can be visually recognized. For example, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a predetermined partial area of the priority display image by reducing the display size before displaying the priority display image, or the specific selection subject image in the image display unit. By displaying the priority display image superimposed on the display screen in a part of the effect display screen, the priority display image can be visually recognized even when the priority display image is displayed on the image display means. Thereby, even when the priority display image is displayed on the image display means, the player can enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game.

[Appendix B14]
A specific selection subject image effect execution for executing the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game, on condition that the effect determination means (51) determines that the specific selection subject image effect is being executed. Storage means (512) for storing information (specific character effect stock flag);
The gaming machine according to claim B1, wherein the effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect when the storage means stores the specific selection subject image effect execution information. .

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B14, as a compensation when visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered by the display of the priority display image on the image display means, the amount of the visual recognition hindered in the next special game Is performed. Thereby, even when the priority display image hinders the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game.

[Appendix B15]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to attachment B14, wherein the storage unit stores the specific selection subject image effect execution information on condition that the second special game is executed.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B15, on condition that the second special game is being executed, if the priority display image impairs the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect, visual recognition is impaired in the next special game. The selected specific subject image effect is executed. That is, when it is assumed that the time during which the next special game is executed is relatively short, the specific selection subject image effect corresponding to the hindrance in the next special game is executed. As a result, the specific selection subject image effect corresponding to the inhibition of the visual recognition is executed as the privilege of the second special game, and the player can enjoy the privilege. In addition, under the condition that the second special game is being executed, the compensation in the case where the priority display image is displayed on the image display means and the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is obstructed is compensated for. Can be prevented from being performed first.

[Appendix B16]
The effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby executing the specific selection subject image effect in the special game. When executing two or more times, the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information is executed as an effect different from the other specific selection subject image effect. The gaming machine according to B14 or B15.

[Appendix B17]
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round games) to which the game proceeds after the completion of the opening and which provides a player with a game value (game ball),
The effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information stored in the storage means, thereby executing the specific selection subject image effect in the special game. The gaming machine according to attachment B16, wherein when the game is executed two or more times, the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information is executed at the opening.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B16 and Supplementary Note B17, when the specific display subject image effect is disturbed by the priority display image, the specific selection subject image effect is executed twice or more in the next special game. The specific selection subject image effect executed as the compensation is executed as an effect different from other specific selection subject image effects. Therefore, by executing the same specific selection subject image effect two or more times, it is possible to suppress a feeling of getting tired of the specific selection subject image effect. In particular, by executing the specific selection subject image effect executed as compensation at the opening, the specific selection subject image effect is performed as compared with a case where the same specific selection subject image effect is executed two or more times in a plurality of unit games. It is possible to effectively suppress the feeling of getting tired of the image. In addition, the player can enjoy compensation as a result of obstruction of visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect by the priority display image as a privilege that is performed as a production different from other specific selection subject image effects. , You can enjoy more special games.

[Appendix B18]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific selection subject image effect having a high probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51), and a special specific selection subject image effect having a low probability of being executed by the effect execution means (51). And
Wherein the effect executing means (51) executes the special specific selection subject image effect as the specific selection subject image effect executed based on the specific selection subject image effect execution information. The gaming machine according to any of B17.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note B18, when the specific selection subject image effect is executed during the display of the priority display image, the special specific selection subject image effect having a low execution probability as the specific selection subject image effect in the next special game is performed. Be executed. That is, as compensation for hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect, a rare effect or a premier effect for the specific selection subject is executed in the next special game. Therefore, even if the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect is hindered, it is possible to reduce the feeling of frustration and dissatisfaction of the player at that time by executing the special specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix C1]
Determining means (41) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image effect (variable game effect) is executed in the notification game notifying the determination result, and a special game image effect (big hit game effect) is executed in the special game;
An effect executing means (51) for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round games) to which the game proceeds after the completion of the opening and which provides a player with a game value (game ball),
The notification game image effect is a notification game specific effect subject image effect (a super reach effect, a special reach effect, etc.) in which a specific effect subject (effect character) of a plurality of effect agents (characters) is mainly displayed. Production),
The special game image effect includes a special game specific effect subject image effect (directing character effect) in which the specific effect subject is independently displayed,
The effect executing means (51) is configured to, when the game mode is shifted to the special game state, trigger game image effect being executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game which has triggered the shift to the special game state. In the case of a game specific effect subject image effect, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in at least one of the opening and the first unit game executed first in the plurality of unit games. Gaming machine.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, a special game specific effect subject image effect for the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect in the variable game is executed in the special game. Therefore, in the special game, the player can sufficiently enjoy the special effect subject of the special game specific effect subject image effect in the notification game. In particular, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the special game specific effect main subject image effect is executed at the opening of the special game or the first unit game. Therefore, the special game specific effect main image effect is executed in the special game in a relatively short time after the end of the notification game, in other words, in a relatively short time after the end of the opportunity game image effect in the notification game. Therefore, in a state where the lingering effect of the notification game specific effect main image effect such as the reach effect in the notification game which has triggered the shift to the special game remains, the information game in the opportunity game image effect You can also enjoy the special production subject in special games. Thereby, the specific production subject can be further enjoyed in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
The effect execution means (51) is configured to determine at least one of the opening and the first unit game according to the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect, wherein the special game specific effect subject image The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, wherein the gaming machine performs an effect.

[Appendix C3]
The plurality of directing entities include a first directing entity belonging to a first directing entity group, and a second directing entity belonging to a second directing entity group different from the first directing entity group,
The notification game specific production subject image effect is a first notification game specific production subject image production when the specific production subject is the first production subject and the case where the specific production subject is the second production subject. 2nd notification game specific production subject image production,
The effect executing means (51) includes:
When the specific production subject in the opportunity game image production is the first production subject, the special game specific production subject image production is executed in the opening.
The game according to Supplementary note C2, wherein, when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the second effect subject, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game. Machine.

[Appendix C4]
The effect execution means (51), when the plurality of specific effectors in the opportunity game image effect, is a special game in which some or all of the specific effectors are independently displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C2 or supplementary note C3, wherein the specific effect subject image effect is executed in the opening effect.

[Appendix C5]
The effect deciding means (51) is such that the notification game specific effect subject image effect in the opportunity game image effect is displayed as the specific effect subject, and the effect subject of more than half of the plurality of effect subjects is displayed. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C4, wherein, in some cases, the special game specific effect subject image effect in which the half or more of the effect subjects are displayed is executed in the opening effect.

[Appendix C6]
The effect execution means (51) executes the special game specific effect subject image effect in at least one of the opening and the first unit game determined according to a type of the opportunity game image effect. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C1, which is characterized in that:

[Appendix C7]
The notification game specific effect subject image effect is a first information game specific effect subject image effect belonging to a first effect group, and a second information game specific effect subject image effect belonging to a second effect group different from the first effect group. And
The effect executing means (51) includes:
If the opportunity game image effect is the first notification game specific effect subject image effect, execute the special game specific effect subject image effect in the opening,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C6, wherein, when the opportunity game image effect is the second notification game specific effect subject image effect, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game. .

[Appendix C8]
The first notification game specific effect subject image effect is an effect that is executed when a game time in the notification game is longer than the second notification game specific effect subject image effect, and is described in Appendix C7. Gaming machine.

[Appendix C9]
In the first notification game specific effect subject image effect, the degree of expectation that the determination result in the determination means (41) is to shift to the special game state is higher than the second notification game specific effect subject image effect. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C7, characterized in that the effect is also high.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C2 to C9, the special game specific effect subject image effect is performed in the opening or the first unit game according to the type of the opportunity game image effect or the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect. Be executed. In this way, in the gaming machine, the special game specific effect subject image effect relating to the effect subject grouped according to the type of the opportunity game image effect and the type of the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is executed. As a result, the special game can be enjoyed in a style that reflects the timing game image effect in the notification game that triggered the shift to the special game. In particular, special game specific production subject image productions in which multiple production subjects appear as specific production subjects, such as Allcast Reach, are performed at the opening to enjoy the lingering while reflecting the opportunity game image production Can be.

[Appendix C10]
The special game includes a first special game (5R regular jackpot game) and a second special game (16R probability variable jackpot game) having different advantages for the player,
The effect executing means (51) determines to execute the special game specific effect main subject image effect in at least one of the opening and the first unit game determined according to the type of the special game. The gaming machine according to supplementary note C1, characterized in that:

[Appendix C11]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The first special game is to be shifted to the first notification game state after the end of the first special game,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10, wherein the second special game is to be shifted to the second notification game state after the end of the second special game.

[Appendix C12]
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C11, wherein when the second special game is the second special game, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed at the opening.

[Appendix C13]
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10, wherein the first special game and the second special game have different numbers of the plurality of unit games.

[Appendix C14]
The second special game executes a greater number of the unit games than the first special game,
The effect executing means (51) includes:
In the case of the first special game, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the opening,
The gaming machine according to supplementary note C10, wherein when the second special game is the second special game, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the first unit game.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes C10 to C14, the special game specific effect subject image effect is executed in the opening or the first unit game according to the jackpot type. Therefore, the special game can be enjoyed in a style that reflects the determination result of the variable game (game state of the special game) that triggered the shift to the special game. For example, in the case of the second special game state which is more advantageous for the player, the special game specific effect main subject image effect is executed at the opening. Thereby, in the opening which is executed prior to the unit game in the case of the advantageous second special game, that is, immediately after the end of the special game, the player keeps the lingering sound, and produces the opportunity game image effect in the special game. You can enjoy the specific production subject.

[Appendix C15]
The effect executing means (51) executes an effect other than the special game specific effect subject image effect in the unit game executed after the end of the first unit game of the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C14.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C15, it is possible to prevent the special game specific effect subject image effect from being repeatedly executed. Thereby, the player can enjoy the special game specific effect main subject image effect only in the opening or the first unit game in which the lingering sound in the notification game effect remains largely.

[Appendix C16]
The effect executing means (51) is configured to execute the special game in any one of the unit games to be executed after the end of the first unit game among the plurality of unit games when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes C1 to C15, wherein the gaming machine executes a specific presentation subject image presentation.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note C16, when a predetermined condition, for example, the specific production subject is the same as the selection subject selected by the player, in the unit game executed after the end of the first unit game, the special game specification is performed. An effect subject image effect is executed. Therefore, the player performs the special game specific effect main subject image effect other than the opening and the first unit game, so that the player can confirm the special game specific effect main subject image effect for the specific effect subject in the notification game effect. Attention can be given to the display means. Thereby, it is possible to positively apprehend the effects to the effectors other than the specific effector, and to give an opportunity to confirm the goodness of the effectors other than the specific effector.

[Appendix D1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) in which a notification game image effect (variable game effect) is executed in the notification game notifying the determination result, and a special game image effect (big hit game effect) is executed in the special game;
Effect execution means for causing the image display means (341) to execute the notification game image effect and the special game image effect;
With
The notification game image effect is a specific effect subject image effect (a direct character effect such as a super reach effect or a special reach effect) in which a specific effect subject (direct character) of a plurality of effect agents (characters) is independently displayed. Including
The special game image effect is a specific selection subject image effect (specific character) executed by the image display means (341) mainly by a specific selection subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selection subjects (characters). Production),
The effect execution means, when the transition to the special game state, the timing game image effect that was executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game that triggered the transition to the special game state is the specific effect subject image In the case of an effect, the gaming machine executes the specific selection subject image effect on condition that the specific effect subject in the specific effect subject image effect is the same as the specific selection subject.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, when the specific production subject in the trigger game image production executed at a predetermined timing is the same as the specific selection subject, the specific production subject (that is, the specific selection subject) in the special game Is performed for the specific selection subject image effect. Therefore, in the special game, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific production subject (specific selection subject) that the player has an affinity for.

[Appendix D2]
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games to be transferred after the completion of the opening and to provide a game value to a player,
The effect executing means (51), when the specific effecting entity in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selecting entity, the opening and a predetermined specific unit game of the plurality of unit games. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D1, wherein at least one of the game machines executes the specific selection subject image effect.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, the specific selection subject image effect of the special game is executed at least one of the opening and the specific unit game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the special production subject (specific selection subject) in the trigger game image production of the variable game which triggered the shift to the special game in the special game.

[Appendix D3]
The effect deciding means (51), when the specific effecting entity in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selecting agent, performs the specific selecting object image effect in both the opening and the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D2, which is executed.

[Appendix D4]
The specific selection subject image rendering includes a first specific selection subject image rendering and a second specific rendering subject image rendering different from the first specific selection subject image rendering,
The effect execution means (51) executes the first selection subject image effect at the opening when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, and the specific unit game The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3, wherein the second selection subject image effect is executed in the game machine.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D3 and Supplementary Note D4, as a privilege that the specific production subject is the same as the specific selection subject, the special selection subject image production of the special game is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game. . For this reason, in both the opening and the specific unit game, the player sets the specific production subject (specific selection subject) in the trigger game image production of the variable game, which triggered the shift to the special game, as a different production. You can enjoy times.

[Appendix D5]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low-probability mode) and a second notification game state (the probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state). High probability mode) and
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The effect deciding means (51) is configured such that, when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific effect subject, the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, wherein the first specific selection subject image effect is executed at an opening, and the second specific selection subject image effect is executed at the specific unit game.

[Appendix D6]
Holding means for holding the right to progress the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the holding means,
Further comprising
The effect executing means (51), when the specific effecting entity in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selecting entity, among the determination results for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means The first specific selection subject image effect is executed in the opening on the condition that a game that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game is executed, and the second unit game is executed in the specific unit game. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D4, which performs 2 specific selection subject image effects.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D5 and Supplementary Note D6, in addition to the fact that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same, the opening and the specific unit game A specific selection subject image effect is executed on both sides. In other words, on the condition that it is the second special game, or that the reserved series is fixed, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in both the opening and the specific unit game, so that the opening and the specific unit When the specific selection subject image effect is executed in both of the games, it is possible to know that the state is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the special game, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to whether or not the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the specific unit game in addition to the opening.

[Appendix D7]
The effect execution means, when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, in the non-specific unit game other than the specific unit game of the plurality of unit games, The gaming machine according to attachment D2, wherein an effect other than the specific selection subject image effect is executed.

[Appendix D8]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low-probability mode) and a second notification game state (the probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state). High probability mode) and
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The effect executing means (51) is provided, if the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection agent, on condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to attachment D7, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a non-specific unit game.

[Appendix D9]
Holding means for holding the right to progress the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the holding means,
Further comprising
The effect executing means (51), when the specific effecting entity in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selecting entity, among the determination results for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means Wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game on condition that a game that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game is included. A gaming machine according to D7.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes D7 to D9, the execution of the specific selection subject image effect on the specific presentation subject (that is, the specific selection subject) other than the opening and the specific round is restricted. Therefore, the player can enjoy the specific selection subject image effect as a specialized effect that can be executed in the opening and the specific unit game. On the other hand, in the non-specific unit game, on condition that the special game state is the second special game state (for example, the probable change game state), or that the execution of the hold extended game is determined after the end of the special game. , A specific selection subject image effect is executed. In other words, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game only when it is in a state advantageous to the player. Therefore, in order to confirm whether the state is advantageous to the player, the player pays attention to whether the specific selection subject image effect is executed in the non-specific unit game. Thereby, the player can enjoy the special game by paying attention to the effect in the non-specific unit game and confirming whether or not the player is in an advantageous state.

[Appendix D10]
The gaming machine according to any one of supplementary notes D2 to D9, wherein the specific unit game is a first unit game executed first among the plurality of unit games.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note D10, after the end of the variable game, the specific selection subject image effect is executed in a series of flows from the opening to the first unit game (first unit game) in the special game. Therefore, in a state where the lingering of the opportunity game image effect in the variable game which has triggered the shift to the special game is left, a series of the opening and the first unit game from the end of the opportunity game image effect. In the flow, a specific production subject (specific selection subject) can be enjoyed even in a special game.

[Appendix D11]
The specific selection subject image effect is a normal specific production subject image effect executed by the effect execution means (51) when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is different from the specific selection subject, and the opportunity game The game according to supplementary note D1, characterized by including a special specific production subject image production executed by the production execution means (51) when the specific production subject in the image production is the same as the specific selection subject. Machine.

[Appendix D12]
The notification game state includes a first notification game state (low-probability mode) and a second notification game state (the probability that the determination unit determines to shift to the special game state is higher than the first notification game state). High probability mode) and
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The effect executing means (51) is provided, if the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection agent, on condition that the special game state is the second special game state. The gaming machine according to attachment D11, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect.

[Appendix D13]
Holding means for holding the right to progress the notification game by the main control means up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means for storing the determination result for the hold notification game held by the holding means,
Further comprising
The effect determination means, when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject, in the determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage means, The special selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect on the condition that a condition for shifting to the special game state after execution of the hold notification game is included, and the specific selection subject image effect is executed. Gaming machine.

[Appendix D14]
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games to be transferred after the completion of the opening and to provide a game value to a player,
The effect executing means (51) is configured to execute the first unit game executed first in the opening and the plurality of unit games when the specific effect subject in the opportunity game image effect is the same as the specific selection subject. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Note D11 to Supplementary Note D13, wherein, in at least one of the above, the specific selection subject image effect is executed as the specific selection subject image effect.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note D11 to Supplementary Note D, the special specific selection subject image effect is executed on condition that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same. That is, the player can enjoy the special specific selection subject image production as a privilege that the specific production subject and the specific selection subject are the same.

[Appendix E1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect is a game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as a subject, and the image display means (341) a visual obstruction effect that impedes the visual recognition of the effect performed in (341),
The gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means (51) executes the specific selection subject image effect before the execution of the visual impairment effect, and does not execute the specific selection subject image effect after the execution of the visual impairment effect. .

[Appendix E2]
The effect unit (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio of the image display unit (341) covering the display screen is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepare
The gaming machine according to attachment E1, wherein the visual obstruction effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix E3]
In the visual obstruction effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information is displayed in a layer that can be visually recognized in a multi-layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note E1 or E2, characterized in that the effect is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes E1 to E3, the specific selection subject image effect is executed before the execution of the viewing inhibition effect, and the specific selection subject image effect is not executed after the execution of the viewing inhibition effect. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific selection subject image effect as a sign effect of performing the visual inhibition effect. For example, the specific selection subject image effect may be a sign effect that a movable member operation effect is executed or an information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member actuation effect will be executed or the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect, and the player A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether an image effect is executed.

[Appendix F1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect determination means (41) for determining the game effect to be executed by the effect means (341 or the like);
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game production,
As the game effect executed in the notification game, a notification effect specific effect subject image effect (super-reach effect, special reach) in which a specific effect subject (effect character) of a plurality of effect agents (characters) is mainly displayed. Directing character directing such as directing)
As the game effect executed in the special game, a special game specific effect subject image effect (specific character effect) in which the specific effect subject is mainly displayed, and an effect executed in the image display means (341). A visual obstruction effect that impairs visual recognition,
The effect executing means (51) determines that the visual recognition inhibition effect is to be executed by the effect determining means (51), and, when the effect is shifted to the special game state, when the shift to the special game state is triggered. A gaming machine characterized by executing the specific selection subject image effect when the trigger game image effect that has been executed at a predetermined timing of the notification game is the notification game specific effect subject image effect.

[Appendix F2]
The effect unit (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio of the image display unit (341) covering the display screen is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepare
The gaming machine according to claim F1, wherein the visual obstruction effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix F3]
In the visual obstruction effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information is displayed in a layer that can be visually recognized in a multi-layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note F1 or F2, characterized in that the effect is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes F1 to F3, the special game specific effect main subject image effect is executed when the trigger game image effect is the notification game specific effect main subject image effect at the time of performing the visual recognition inhibition effect. Therefore, it is possible to use the specific selection subject image effect as a sign effect of performing the visual inhibition effect. For example, the specific selection subject image effect may be a sign effect that a movable member operation effect is executed or an information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member actuation effect will be executed or the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect, and the player A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether an image effect is executed.

[Appendix G1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
An effect executing means (51) for causing the effect means to execute the game effect;
With
The special game includes an opening, and a plurality of unit games (round games) to which the game proceeds after the completion of the opening and which provides a player with a game value (game ball),
The game effect is a game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the selection subject as a subject, and the image display means (341) a visual obstruction effect that impedes the visual recognition of the effect performed in (341),
The effect executing means (51) is configured to execute the specific selection before the execution of the visual impairment effect in the special game and in both the opening and the predetermined specific unit game of the plurality of unit games. A gaming machine characterized by executing a main image effect.

[Appendix G2]
The effect unit (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio of the image display unit (341) covering the display screen is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepare
The gaming machine according to supplementary note G1, wherein the visual obstruction effect is a movable member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix G3]
In the visual obstruction effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information is displayed in a layer that can be visually recognized in a multi-layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note G1 or G2, characterized in that the effect is an effect displayed in (1).

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Note G1 to Supplementary Note G3, the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times before the visual recognition inhibition effect is executed. Therefore, it can be used as a sign effect that the specific selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times. For example, the execution of the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times can be used as an indication effect that the visual impairment effect is executed. For example, the execution of the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times can be a sign effect that the movable member operation effect is executed or the information notification image is displayed. Therefore, the player can predict that the movable member actuation effect will be executed and / or the information notification image will be displayed by executing the specific selection subject image effect a plurality of times. A special game can be enjoyed while paying attention to whether the selection subject image effect is executed a plurality of times.

[Appendix H1]
Judging means (41) for judging whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the judgment condition;
A main control means (41) for controlling the progress of the game based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means (41);
An image display means (341) for displaying a specific selected subject image (selected character image 714) for a specific selected subject (selected character) selected by the player from a plurality of selected subjects (characters); Effect means (341 or the like) in which a game effect (big hit game effect, variable game effect) is executed in a notification game (variable game) for notifying the determination result;
Effect execution means (51) for causing the effect means (341 or the like) to execute the game effect;
With
The game effect is a game effect executed in the special game, a specific selection subject image effect (specific character effect) executed in the image display means (341) with the specific selection subject as a subject, and the image display. A visual inhibition effect that inhibits visual recognition of the effect performed in the means (341).
When performing the visual impairment effect in the special game, the effect executing means (51) sets the timing for executing the visual impairment effect, and then sets the timing at a timing different from the timing for executing the visual impairment effect. A gaming machine having means for setting so as to execute a selection subject image effect.

[Appendix H2]
The special game includes a plurality of unit games (round games) for giving a game value (game balls) to a player,
The effect executing means (51) includes:
At a first timing set in a first period in which a unit game selected from the plurality of unit games is executed, the visual impairment effect is executed,
The gaming machine according to attachment H1, wherein the specific selection subject image effect is executed at a second timing set in a second period other than the first period in the special game.

[Appendix H3]
The special game further includes an opening before executing a plurality of unit games,
The gaming machine according to attachment H2, wherein the second period is a period other than the unit game in which the viewing inhibition effect is executed among the opening and the plurality of unit games.

  In the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H1 to Supplementary Note H3, in the special game, the unit game in which the specific selection subject image effect for the specific selection subject selected by the player is different from the visual impairment effect, for example, the visual impairment effect is executed It is executed in a different unit game or opening. Therefore, the player can sufficiently enjoy the specific selection subject image effect in the special game without the visual recognition inhibition effect hindering the visual recognition of the specific selection subject image effect. Further, the specific selection subject image effect is executed at various timings including the opening, though affected by the execution timing of the visual impairment effect. Therefore, when it is desired to view the specific selection subject image effect, it is necessary to pay attention to the image display means from the start of the special game, so that the player can concentrate on the effect performed by the image display means. Will be possible. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the effect intended by the gaming machine in the special game. For example, to provide an opportunity to view an image effect for a selected subject other than the specific selected subject selected by the player, and to provide a motivation to newly select a selected subject other than the currently selected specific selected subject as a specific selected subject. Can be.

[Appendix H4]
In the visual obstruction effect, an information notification image (831, 851, 861, 871, etc.) for notifying predetermined information is displayed in a layer that can be visually recognized in a multi-layer image in which a plurality of images are superimposed. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H3, wherein the effect is an effect displayed in (1).

[Appendix H5]
In the information notification image, in one or more execution periods of the special game satisfying a predetermined condition, an integrated value (cumulative number of balls) of a game value (game balls) given to a player has a predetermined game value. The gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H4, which is an image (861) for notifying that the number has been exceeded.

[Appendix H6]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to attachment H4 or H5, wherein the information notification image is an image (831) indicating or indicating that the special gaming state is the second special gaming state.

[Appendix H7]
Holding means (41) for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held notification game held by the holding means (41);
Further comprising
The information notification image includes, in the determination result for the hold notification game stored in the hold result storage unit (412), an image that shifts to the special game state after the execution of the hold notification game. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H4 to H6, wherein the game machine is an image (851) that suggests or clearly indicates that the game has been performed.

  According to the gaming machines according to Supplementary Notes H4 to H7, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being disturbed by various information notification images serving as visual recognition inhibiting effects.

[Appendix H8]
The effect unit (341, etc.) further includes a movable member (39) movable between a standby position where the covering ratio of the image display unit (341) covering the display screen is low and an operating position where the covering ratio is high. Prepare
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes H1 to H7, wherein the visual obstruction effect is a moving member operation effect in which the movable member (39) is moved from the standby position to the operating position.

[Appendix H9]
The notification game state is a first notification game state (low probability mode), and a second notification in which the determination unit (41) has a higher probability of being determined to shift to the special game state than the first notification game state. Game state (high probability mode),
The special game state is a first special game state (5R normal jackpot game state) in which the special game is shifted to the first notification game state after completion of the special game, and a shift to the second notification game state after completion of the special game. Second special game state (5R probability change jackpot game state, 16R probability change jackpot game state),
The gaming machine according to attachment H8, wherein the movable member operation effect is an effect indicating or indicating that the special game state is the second special game state.

[Appendix H10]
Holding means (41) for holding the right to proceed with the notification game by the main control means (41) up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Holding result storage means (412) for storing the determination result for the held notification game held by the holding means (41);
Further comprising
The movable member operation effect includes, in the determination result for the suspension notification game stored in the suspension result storage means (412), a transition to the special game state after the execution of the suspension notification game. The gaming machine according to supplementary note H8 or supplementary note H9, characterized in that the effect indicates or indicates that the game machine is present.

  According to the gaming machine according to Supplementary Note H8 to Supplementary Note H10, it is possible to prevent the specific selection subject image effect from being disturbed by various effects such as a movable member operation effect, a promotion effect, and a reservation extended residence effect that are visual recognition disturbing effects. it can.

10: gaming machine 20: operation button 20a: operation switch 21: selection determination unit 21A: selection button 211: upper selection button 212: lower selection button 213: left selection button 214: right selection buttons 211a to 211d: selection operation switch 21B: Set button 21Ba: Set operation switch 26: Speaker 316: Variable winning opening 331: Main control unit 332: Sub control unit 341: Symbol display unit 39: Movable accessory member 4: Main control device 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
5: Voice lamp controller 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device 61: MPU
611: ROM
612: RAM
714: Selected character 74: Character selection screen 741 to 747: Character selection image 81: Round game effect screen 811: Round display image 812: Big hit round number display image 813: Character introduction image 82: Button operation request screen 821: Operation button image 83: Promotion successful production screen 84: Promotion failure production screen 85: Hold consecutive residence confirmation display screen 86: Specific number payout display image display screen 87: Error occurrence image display screen

Claims (1)

Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on establishment of the determination condition;
Main control means for controlling the progress of the game based on the determination result in the determination means,
When the player performs a predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, a subject effect display means for determining and displaying a specific select subject effect from a plurality of select subject effects,
The special game, and effect means for executing a game effect in the notification game for notifying the determination result,
Effect execution means for causing the effect means to execute the game effect,
With
The game effect is displayed as an image game effect executed in the special game, using a subject corresponding to the specific selection subject effect, a specific subject image effect in which a display timing is set at the start of the special game, Including a viewing inhibition image effect that hinders the visual recognition of the predetermined game image effect by being displayed on the front side than the predetermined game image effect displayed in the special game,
The visual obstruction image effect is displayed when a predetermined condition different from the determination result of the determination means for the special game is satisfied during execution of the special game, and a display timing is set at the start of the special game. It is an image production that is not done,
A gaming machine, wherein in a predetermined special game state, the visual impairment image effect is set such that the specific subject image effect and the visual impairment image effect are displayed at different timings without overlapping.

Images